SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Always read these instructions before using this product.)

Before using this product, thoroughly read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
and pay careful attention to safety and handle the products properly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety precautions of the
programmable controller system, refer to the User's Manual for the CPU module.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as " WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

WARNING death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

CAUTION minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Note that the CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances.
Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Design Instructions]

WARNING
● When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running
programmable controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole
system always operates safely.
Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the
corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as
a system.

[Startup/Maintenance Instructions]

CAUTION
● The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program
change when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status changes such as forced input/output
operation and RUN-STOP switching, and remote control operation) must be executed after the manual has been
carefully read and the safety has been ensured.
When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some
operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in Section 12.9 before use.
● The positioning test functions of OPR, JOG, inching or positioning data for QD75/LD75 positioning module must be
executed with the programmable controller set to STOP after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has
been ensured. Specially when executing the function on the network system, ensure the safety thoroughly since the
machinery whose operation cannot be checked by an operator may be activated. The operation failure may cause the
injury or machine damage.

A-1
 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or
serious accident; and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the
PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general
industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT,
PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO
PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT
INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN
MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND
GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other
cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a
special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator
and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for
Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or
Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to
the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the
PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is
limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special
quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general
specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi representative
in your region.

A-2
REVISIONS
Print date Manual number*1 Revision
Jul. 2008 SH(NA)-080779ENG-A First edition
Jan. 2009 SH(NA)-080779ENG-B Model Addition
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, FX series
Addition
MANUALS, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.5, Section 2.1.6,
Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.8, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.8, Section 5.2, Section 12.8,
Section 13.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.6, Section 14.7, Section 15.2.2, Section 15.3,
Section 15.4, Section 17.1.2, Section 17.4.3, Section 17.4.4, Appendix 6
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3, Section 2.1.4,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.4,
Section 3.2.6, Section 3.3.1, Section 3.3.4, Section 4.1.6, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.2.1,
Section 4.3, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.4.1, Section 4.5.2,
Section 4.5.3, Section 4.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.4, Section 8.1.2,
Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 11.1.1,
Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.8.1, Section 12.2, Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1,
Section 12.9.5, Section 13.1.1, Section 14.1, Section 14.3, Section 15.5.4, Section 16.1,
Section 16.3, Section 16.5, Section 17.4.1, Section 17.4.2, Section 18.3.2, Chapter 19,
Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 7, Appendix 8,
Appendix 9.3
Jul. 2009 SH(NA)-080779ENG-C Model Addition
Q00J, Q00, Q01
Addition
Section 4.1.4, Section 7.2.4, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5,
Section 11.1.2, Section 12.9.3, Section 12.10, Section 15.2.1, Section 15.2.2,
Section 15.2.3, Section 16.5, Section 18.6.1, Chapter 19
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.8,
Section 4.2.1, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.6, Section 4.8,
Section 5.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.3, Section 7.3,
Section 7.4.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 10.3.1,
Section 10.3.6, Section 11.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.9, Section 12.1,
Section 12.1.5, Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.11,
Section 14.2.2, Section 14.7, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 16.2, Section 16.4,
Section 17.2, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.6, Section 20.2, Section 20.3,
Section 21.2, Section 22.2.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 6,
Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9, Appendix 10
Modification
Section 4.1.4 to 4.1.7 → Section 4.1.5 to 4.1.8, Section 4.6.4 → Section 4.7,
Section 4.7 to 4.8 → Section 4.8 to 4.9, Section 7.2.4 to 7.2.5 → Section 7.2.5 to 7.2.6,
Section 10.2 to 10.3 → Section 10.1 to 10.2, Section 11.1.2 → Section 11.2.3,
Section 11.9.3 to 11.9.5 → Section 11.9.4 to 11.9.6, Section 12.10 → Section 12.11,
Section 14.2.3 to 14.2.4 → Section 14.2.2 to 14.2.3, Section 15.1.1 → Section 15.2,
Section 15.1.2 → Section 15.4, Section 15.2 to 15.5 → Section 16.1 to 16.4,
Chapter 16 to 17 → Chapter 17 to 18, Chapter 18 to 19 → Chapter 20 to 21,
Appendix 7 → Appendix 6, Appendix 10 → Appendix 8
Deletion
Section 3.3.5, Section 4.4.1
Oct. 2009 SH(NA)-080779ENG-D Addition
Appendix 13
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 4.1.7, Section 6.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.3,
Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 12.2, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1, Section 21.2,
Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.4, Appendix 4.5,
Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.14, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10.1,
Appendix 12

A-3
 Print date Manual number*1 Revision
Jan. 2010 SH(NA)-080779ENG-E Model Addition
L02, L26-BT
Addition
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 3.3.4, Section 13.2, Section 16.6,
Section 18.4.5, Section 18.6.1, Section 18.7, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 14
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3,
Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.7, Section 4.1.1,
Section 4.1.3, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.1.8, Section 4.3, Section 4.5.1, Section 4.5.5,
Section 4.6, Section 6.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.3, Section 6.4, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.6,
Section 7.3, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3,
Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.5, Section 11.7, Section 11.8.1,
Section 11.8.2, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.2, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.2, Section 12.3,
Section 12.5, Section 12.6, Section 12.8, Section 12.8.2, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.2,
Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.5, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3,
Section 12.10.4, Section 12.11, Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.3.1,
Section 13.3.2, Section 13.3.3, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.7, Section 15.1,
Section 15.2, Section 15.2.1, Section 15.2.3, Section 16.1, Section 16.4.1, Section 16.4.2,
Section 16.4.3, Section 16.4.4, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.4,
Section 17.5, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.2, Section 18.1.3, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.4.1,
Section 18.4.3, Section 18.5, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.6, Section 19.3,
Section 19.4.1, Section 19.4.2, Section 19.5.3, Section 19.6, Section 19.8, Section 21.1,
Section 21.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.5,
Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7.1, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 5, Appendix 6,
Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1, Appendix 9, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2,
Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 12
Apr. 2010 SH(NA)-080779ENG-F Model Addition
Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, LJ72GF15-T2
Addition
Section 4.1.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 12.12, Section 18.1.4,
Section 18.4, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 10.8
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.1,
Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.8,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2, Section 3.4, Section 3.5, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.6,
Section 4.6.3, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.4,
Section 10.1.1, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.5,
Section 11.6, Section 11.7, Section 12.4.1, Section 12.6, Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1,
Section 12.9.2, Section 12.9.6, Section 11.2.3, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.2, Section 16.1,
Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.6,
Section 18.1, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.7, Section 18.7.2,
Section 20.1, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Chapter 22, Appendix 1.1,
Appendix 1.6, Appendix 2, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.9,
Appendix 4.13, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12,
Appendix 13
Modification
Section 18.4 to 18.6 → Section 18.5 to 18.7,
Appendix 4.13 to 4.14 → Appendix 4.14 to 4.15

A-4
 Print date Manual number*1 Revision
Sept. 2010 SH(NA)-080779ENG-G Model Addition
QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
Addition
Section 16.2.2, Section 17.7, Section 18.8, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 15
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.4, Section 1.3.5, Section 1.3.8, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.2,
Section 2.1.4, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.3,
Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.4, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.3,
Section 3.3.4, Section 3.3.5, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.1.3, Section 4.1.7,
Section 4.1.8, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.5.3, Section 4.5.5, Section 4.6,
Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 4.9, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 10.1,
Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3,
Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.1, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2, Section 11.2.1,
Section 11.2.2, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.5, Section 11.6,
Section 11.7.1, Section 11.7.2, Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 11.9, Section 12.1,
Section 12.1.3, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.2, Section 12.3, Section 12.4,
Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.5, Section 12.12, Section 13.1, Section 13.1.1,
Section 13.2, Section 13.2.1, Section 14.1.1, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.1, Section 14.2.2,
Section 14.3, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.2, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3,
Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.2.5, Section 18.2.7,
Section 18.2.8, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.4.4, Section 18.4.5, Section 18.4.6,
Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.6.4, Section 18.7,
Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.12, Appendix 4.14,
Appendix 4.15, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9,
Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5,
Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12, Appendix 15
Modification
Appendix 4.6.3 → Appendix 4.6.2, Appendix 2.3 → Appendix 2.4
Jan. 2011 SH(NA)-080779ENG-H Addition
TERMS, Section 3.3, Section 4.1, Section 12.5, Section 14.1, Section 14.3.4, Section 20.4,
Appendix 16
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3,
Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.6,
Section 4.1.2, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4, Section 4.2.5,
Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.8,
Section 6.1.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.4.1, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2,
Section 11.8, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Chapter 14, Section 16.3,
Section 18.1.1, Section 18.7, Section 19.1.1, Section 19.1.3, Section 20.2, Section 20.3.1,
Section 20.3.2, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 4,
Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 15, Appendix 16
Modification
Section 4.1 to 4.9 → Section 4.2 to 4.10, Section 12.5 → Section 12.6,
Section 14.1 to 14.7 → Section 14.2 to 14.8
Mar. 2011 SH(NA)-080779ENG-I Addition
Section 4.9, Section 16.6, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5,
Section 20.6, Section 20.11,
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.1,
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.3, Section 4.2.1,
Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7.1,
Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.4, Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3,
Section 11.1.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.7.1, Section 12.9.1, Section 14.1.2,
Section 14.6.2, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.6.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.6.3,
Section 20.5.7, Section 20.8.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4,
Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 16, Appendix 17
Modification
Section 20.1 → Section 20.2, Section 20.2 → Section 20.9, Section 20.3.1 → Section 20.7,
Section 20.3.2 → Section 20.10, Section 20.4 → Section 20.8,
Appendix 15 and 16 → Appendix 16 and 17

A-5
 Print date Manual number*1 Revision
Jul. 2011 SH(NA)-080779ENG-J Model Addition
L02-P, L26-PBT
Addition
Section 2.1.9, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 10.1.2,
Section 12.10.4, Section 20.5.1, Section 20.5.2, Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.8,
Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.5.15, Section 20.5.16,
Section 20.5.18, Appendix 1.2
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 2.2,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.1, Section 3.3, Section 3.4, Section 4.1, Section 4.1.1,
Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.1,
Section 4.11, Section 4.11.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.4.2,
Section 10.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.3, Section 10.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2,
Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 11.6, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6,
Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.1, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3,
Section 13.3, Section 16.6, Section 16.6.1, Section 16.6.2, Section 16.6.3, Section 16.6.4,
Section 16.6.5, Section 16.6.8, Section 17.1, Section 17.5, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.4,
Section 18.5.1, Section 18.6.2, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5.2,
Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.18, Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.5,
Section 20.5.6, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11, Section 20.10, Section 20.11, Section 21.1,
Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.10,
Appendix 4.13, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 4.18, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7,
Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 2.1.9 → Section 2.1.10,
Section 3.4.6 and Section 3.4.7 → Section 3.4.3 and Section 3.4.4,
Section 4.1.2 → Section 4.1.3, Section 5.2 → Section 5.4, Section 10.1.2 → Section 10.1.3,
Section 12.10.4 → Section 12.10.5,
Section 20.5.1 to Section 20.5.4 → Section 20.5.4 to Section 20.5.7,
Section 20.5.5 to Section 20.5.7 → Section 20.5.9 to Section 20.5.11,
Section 20.5.8 → Section 20.5.17,
Appendix 1.2 to Appendix 1.8 → Appendix 1.3 to Appendix 1.9
Deletion
Section 3.4.2, Section 3.4.3, Section 3.4.5, Section 3.4.6
Sept. 2011 SH(NA)-080779ENG-K Addition
Section 2.1.10, Section 9.5, Section 11.9, Section 20.3.1
Correction
TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.4, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8,
Section 4.6.5, Section 6.2, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.4.2, Section 11.1.1,
Section 12.1.3, Section 12.2, Section 18.1.1, Section 20.2, Section 20.3, Section 20.4,
Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.5, Section 20.5.6, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11,
Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.11, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.6,
Appendix 4.16, Appendix 5.1, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10,
Appendix 12, Appendix 13.1, Appendix 13.2
Modification
Section 2.1.10 → Section 2.1.11, Section 11.9 → Section 11.10
Deletion
Section 6.2.2

A-6
 Print date Manual number*1 Revision
Nov. 2011 SH(NA)-080779ENG-L Addition
Section 1.3.7, Section 4.3.5, Section 6.2.2, Section 6.2.3, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.5,
Section 6.6, Chapter 22, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 18
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.1, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1,
Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.7.1,
Section 6.1.2, Section 6.2, Section 6.4, Section 9.3.1, Section 9.3.2, Section 9.4.2,
Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 11.1, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.3, Section 11.8.1,
Section 11.9, Section 12.1.3, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Section 12.11.1, Section 13.1,
Section 13.2, Section 14.1.1, Section 15.1.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.2,
Section 18.5.3, Section 18.5.4, Section 18.5.5, Section 18.7, Section 20.1, Section 21.2,
Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.6, Appendix 4.11,
Appendix 4.17, Appendix 4.19, Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1, Appendix 9, Appendix 12,
Appendix 15, Appendix 17
Modification
Section 1.3.7 to Section 1.3.9 → Section 1.3.8 to Section 1.3.10,
Section 4.3.5 → Section 4.3.6,
Appendix 2.1 to Appendix 2.2 → Appendix 2.2 to Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.3 → Appendix 2.1,
Appendix 4.16 to Appendix 4.18 → Appendix 4.17 to Appendix 4.19
Jan. 2012 SH(NA)-080779ENG-M Model Addition
FX3GC
Addition
Section 18.4.2
Correction
Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.3, Section 3.4.1,
Section 4.2.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.2.2, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.9,
Section 12.1, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.9.6, Section 18.4, Section 18.4.4, Section 18.4.6,
Section 18.4.7, Section 20.5.2, Section 21.2, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1,
Appendix 10.7, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 18.4.2 to Section 18.4.6 → Section 18.4.3 to Section 18.4.7
Deletion
Section 4.7.3

A-7
 Print date Manual number*1 Revision
May 2012 SH(NA)-080779ENG-N Model Addition
Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, Q25PRH
Addition
Section 6.2, Section 9.4, Section 11.5, Section 12.11.2, Section 17.2, Section 20.5.1,
Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.6, Appendix 4.20, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6,
Appendix 11.2
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1,
Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.6,
Section 3.2.7, Section 3.3, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.7,
Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.3.6, Section 4.5, Section 4.6.5, Section 4.7.1,
Section 4.10.4, Section 4.11.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.2.2, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.5, Section 6.7,
Section 7.2.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.5.2, Section 10.1,
Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.3, Section 11.4,
Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.3,
Section 14.1.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.4, Section 14.6.2, Section 17.1, Section 17.3,
Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.6.4, Section 18.7, Section 18.8,
Section 20.1, Section 20.5.7, Section 20.5.8, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.12,
Section 20.10, Section 20.11, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3,
Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.2,
Appendix 4.4, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 5, Appendix 6.1,
Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3,
Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 11, Appendix 12,
Appendix 13, Appendix 14, Appendix 17
Modification
Section 6.2 to Section 6.6 → Section 6.3 to Section 6.7,
Section 9.4 to Section 9.5 → Section 9.5 to Section 9.6,
Section 11.5 to Section 11.10 → Section 11.6 to Section 11.11,
Section 17.2 to Section 17.7 → Section 17.3 to Section 17.8,
Section 20.5.1 to Section 20.5.2 → Section 20.5.2 to Section 20.5.3,
Section 20.5.3 → Section 20.5.5,
Section 20.5.4 to Section 20.5.18 → Section 20.5.7 to Section 20.5.21,
Appendix 10.5 to Appendix 10.9 → Appendix 10.7 to Appendix 10.11
Sept. 2012 SH(NA)-080779ENG-O Addition
Section 1.3.7, Section 6.3.2, Section 12.1.6
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.3.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.3, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8,
Section 4.5, Section 4.6.5, Section 4.7.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.4, Section 6.5, Section 9.1.1, Section 10.1.1,
Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4,
Section 10.3.5, Section 11.2.2, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.1.7, Section 12.9.1,
Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.5, Section 15.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 16.4.4,
Section 16.4.5, Section 18.4, Section 18.6, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.7,
Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.11, Appendix 11,
Appendix 12
Modification
Section 1.3.7 to Section 1.3.10 → Section 1.3.8 to Section 1.3.11,
Section 6.3.2 to Section 6.3.4 → Section 6.3.3 to Section 6.3.5

A-8
 Print date Manual number*1 Revision
Feb. 2013 SH(NA)-080779ENG-P Model Addition
Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV, L02S, L06, L26, LJ72MS15
Addition
Section 1.3.9, Section 1.3.10, Section 4.11, Section 13.1, Section 13.5, Section 18.3.2,
Section 18.7, Appendix 13
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2,
Section 1.3.7, Section 1.3.8, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.1,
Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.2.2,
Section 4.2.8, Section 4.5, Section 4.8, Section 4.12.1, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1,
Section 6.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.5, Section 6.4
Section 9.1.1, Section 9.3.1, Section 9.3.2, Section 9.4, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2,
Section 11.2.2, Section 11.5.3, Section 11.7, Section 11.8, Section 11.9.1, Section 11.10,
Section 12.1, Section 12.1.7, Section 12.5, Section 12.8, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.5,
Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Section 13.3, Section 14.2,
Section 14.3, Section 14.6, Section 14.6.1, Section 14.6.2, Section 14.6.3, Section 15.1,
Section 15.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.2.1, Section 16.3.1, Section 16.3.2, Section 16.3.3,
Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.5, Section 16.6.2, Section 16.6.3, Section 16.6.4, Section 16.7,
Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.3, Section 18.4,
Section 18.4.2, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.5.4,
Section 18.5.5, Section 18.6.1, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 19.4.1,
Section 20.5.8, Section 20.10, Section 21.2, Section 22.1.1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.7,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.3,
Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 4.15, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 10,
Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6,
Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 10.10, Appendix 10.11,
Appendix 10.12, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 1.3.9 to Section 1.3.11 → Section 1.3.11 to Section 1.3.13,
Section 4.11 → Section 4.12,
Section 13.1 to Section 13.3 → Section 13.2 to Section 13.4,
Section 18.3.2 to Section 18.3.3 → Section 18.3.3 to Section 18.3.4,
Section 18.7 to Section 18.9 → Section 18.8 to Section 18.10,
Appendix 13 to Appendix 18 → Appendix 14 to Appendix 19

*1 : The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover.

Japanese Manual Version SH-080730-AB

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur
as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A-9
 INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi integrated FA software, MELSOFT series.
Before using the product, thoroughly read this manual to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance
to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 2
REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 3
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 10
CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 10
MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 24
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 32
TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 35

1 OVERVIEW

1.1 Product Overview 1-2

1.2 Features 1-4

1.3 List of Functions 1-9

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 25
1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 26
1.3.5 List of functions for editing in Structured Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28
1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 30
1.3.8 List of functions for CC-Link configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 31
1.3.9 List of functions for AnyWireASLINK configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 32
1.3.10 List of functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 33
1.3.11 List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 33
1.3.12 List of functions for I/O system setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 34
1.3.13 List of functions for predefined protocol support function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 35

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port 2-2

2.1.1 USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module) . . . . 2 - 4
2.1.2 USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.1.3 USB cables (compatible with FX3G and FX3GC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.1.4 RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module) . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
2.1.5 Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7

A - 10
 2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters)
(compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
2.1.8 Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
2.1.9 Connection via AJ65BT-R2N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
2.1.10 Function expansion board (special adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
2.1.11 Connection via GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12

2.2 Connection from I/F Boards 2 - 13

2.2.1 I/F boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules 2 - 15

2.4 System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal Computer 2 - 19

2.5 Supported Programming Languages 2 - 20

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.1 Starting and Exiting GX Works2 3-2

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations 3-3

3.2.1 Main frame configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.2.2 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5
3.2.3 Work windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
3.2.4 Docking windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
3.2.5 Navigation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
3.2.6 Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27

3.3 Selecting Language 3 - 30

3.4 Help Function 3 - 32

3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
3.4.2 Displaying operating manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
3.4.3 Checking version of GX Works2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.1 GX Works2 Project Management 4-2

4.1.1 Workspace format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.1.2 Single file format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.1.3 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5

4.2 Project Operations 4-9

4.2.1 Creating projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
4.2.2 Opening existing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
4.2.3 Saving projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
4.2.5 Deleting projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
4.2.6 Closing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
4.2.7 Verifying project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27

A - 11
 4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data 4 - 33
4.3.1 Adding new data to project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 35
4.3.3 Changing project data names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37
4.3.4 Deleting project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37
4.3.5 Merging data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41

4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data 4 - 43

4.5 Changing Project Types 4 - 44

4.6 Managing Project Revisions 4 - 45

4.6.1 Registering revision information (creating backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 45
4.6.2 Displaying revision list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 46
4.6.3 Restoring backup projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
4.6.4 Deleting revision information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 49
4.6.5 Verifying revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 49

4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats 4 - 51

4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 54
4.7.2 Reading ASC format data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 56

4.8 Saving projects in other formats 4 - 57

4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2 4 - 58

4.10 Setting Security for Projects 4 - 59

4.10.1 Setting/resetting security of projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 62
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63
4.10.3 Logging in projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66
4.10.4 Changing access authority of access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 67
4.10.5 Considerations for using the security function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 68

4.11 Setting Security Key 4 - 69

4.11.1 Managing security key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 70
4.11.2 Locking project with security key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 75
4.11.3 Considerations of security keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 76

4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects 4 - 77

4.12.1 Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 78
4.12.2 Setting/changing block passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 79
4.12.3 Unlocking block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 80

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

5.1 Programming 5-2

5.2 Label Programming 5-2

5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects 5-4

5.3.1 Editing programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.3.2 Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change) . . . . 5 - 6
5.3.3 Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
5.3.4 Verifying programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8

A - 12
 5.3.5 Monitoring programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8

5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects 5-9

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.1 Setting PLC Parameters 6-2

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16

6.2 Setting Redundant Parameters 6 - 18

6.3 Setting Network Parameters 6 - 19

6.3.1 Network parameter item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 42
6.3.4 Registering profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 52
6.3.5 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 53

6.4 Setting Remote Password 6 - 57

6.5 Checking Parameters 6 - 59

6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files 6 - 60

6.7 Setting default parameters 6 - 62

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.1 Device Memory 7-2

7.1.1 Features of device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3

7.2 Setting Device Memory 7-5

7.2.1 Setting device values in units of points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
7.2.3 Setting character strings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
7.2.4 Setting same value simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
7.2.5 Changing display format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
7.2.6 Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14

7.3 Searching Devices 7 - 15

7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data 7 - 16

7.4.1 Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
7.4.2 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17

8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

8.1 Device Initial Values 8-2

8.1.1 Feature of device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2
8.1.2 List of applicable devices for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
8.1.3 Procedure for setting device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4

A - 13
 8.2 Setting Device Initial Values 8-5

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.1 Device Comments 9-2

9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8

9.2 Creating Device Comments 9 - 10

9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12

9.3 Deleting Device Comments 9 - 14

9.3.1 Deleting comments of all devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
9.3.2 Deleting comments of devices being displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14

9.4 Extending Number of Points of Device Comment 9 - 15

9.5 Utilizing Sample Comments 9 - 16

9.5.1 Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
9.5.2 Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17

9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files 9 - 18

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

10.1 Cross Reference 10 - 2

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
10.1.2 Setting conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
10.1.3 Filtering display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11

10.2 Displaying Device List 10 - 13

10.3 Search/Replacement 10 - 16
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22
10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24
10.3.4 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26
10.3.5 Batch replacing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.1 Setting Connection Destinations 11 - 2

11.1.1 Transfer setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 3
11.1.2 Creating connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 5
11.1.3 Specifying connection destination for regular use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 6

11.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly 11 - 7

11.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 7
11.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 10

11.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks 11 - 13

A - 14
 11.4 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System 11 - 20

11.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs 11 - 23

11.5.1 Considerations for routing intelligent function module on extension base unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 25
11.5.2 Operation when system switching occurs on Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 26
11.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 27

11.6 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board 11 - 31

11.7 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module 11 - 33

11.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module 11 - 34

11.8.1 Connection on a 1:1 basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 34
11.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 35

11.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function) 11 - 38

11.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 39
11.9.2 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 42

11.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line 11 - 44

11.10.1 Setting TEL data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 52
11.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 58
11.10.3 Setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 65

11.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU 11 - 66

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU 12 - 2

12.1.1 Setting write/read range of program (program file). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 6
12.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 7
12.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10
12.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 12
12.1.5 Symbolic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 16
12.1.6 Specifying target to write device comments to programmable controller CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 19
12.1.7 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 20

12.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer 12 - 24

12.3 Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data 12 - 29

12.4 Copying Program Memory Data to ROM 12 - 30

12.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data 12 - 31

12.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch 12 - 33

12.7 Latch Data Backup 12 - 35

12.7.1 Backing up latch data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 35
12.7.2 Deleting backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 36

12.8 Backing up/Restoring Data 12 - 37

12.8.1 Backing up data to memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 37
12.8.2 Restoring backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 39

12.9 Online Program Change 12 - 40

12.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 41

A - 15
 12.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 48
12.9.3 Online program change starting from pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 50
12.9.4 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 51
12.9.5 Considerations of Online program change of SFC programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 54
12.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 55

12.10 Calculating Memory Size 12 - 61

12.10.1 Offline calculation and Online calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 61
12.10.2 Setting target data for memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 61
12.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 62
12.10.4 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 65
12.10.5 Considerations of calculating memory size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 66

12.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards 12 - 67

12.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 68
12.11.2 Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/batch load function) . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 71

12.12 Reading Data of Local Devices 12 - 73

13 PROTECTING DATA

13.1 Functions to Protect Data 13 - 2

13.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode)) 13 - 3

13.2.1 Registering/changing password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 4
13.2.2 Canceling password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 6
13.2.3 Unlocking password temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 7

13.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32) 13 - 8

13.3.1 Registering/changing password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9
13.3.2 Canceling password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 11
13.3.3 Unlocking password temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12

13.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU) 13 - 14

13.4.1 Registering/changing keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 14
13.4.2 Canceling keyword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 16
13.4.3 Unlocking keyword temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 17

13.5 Locking with Security Key 13 - 18

14 MONITORING

14.1 Monitoring Function 14 - 2

14.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 2
14.1.2 Monitoring status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 4
14.2 Monitoring Programs 14 - 7

14.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory 14 - 8

14.4 Monitoring Program List 14 - 12

14.5 Monitoring Interrupt Program List 14 - 15

14.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices 14 - 16

A - 16
 14.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16
14.6.2 Registering devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 18
14.6.3 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 21
14.6.4 Writing/reading data to/from CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 22

14.7 Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules 14 - 23

14.8 Starting/Stopping Monitoring All Windows 14 - 23

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS

15.1 Simulation Function 15 - 2

15.1.1 Safety and handling considerations of the simulation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2
15.1.2 Functions available for simulation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2

15.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation 15 - 4

15.2.1 Saving device memory/buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 6
15.2.2 Reading device memory/buffer memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 6
15.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 7

15.3 Checking unsupported instructions/devices 15 - 9

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.1 Changing Current Values 16 - 2

16.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 2
16.1.2 Changing current value of buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 4

16.2 Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output 16 - 6

16.2.1 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 6
16.2.2 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 8
16.3 Device Test with Execution Condition 16 - 9
16.3.1 Registering device test with execution condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 9
16.3.2 Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 11
16.3.3 Batch disabling device test with execution condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 12

16.4 Sampling Trace 16 - 13

16.4.1 Opening sampling trace screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 13
16.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 14
16.4.3 Registering devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 18
16.4.4 Executing sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 21
16.4.5 Saving trace data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 25
16.4.6 Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 29
16.4.7 Considerations when performing sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 31
16.4.8 Compatibility with sampling trace data in GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 31

16.5 Measuring Scan Time 16 - 32

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function 16 - 33

16.6.1 Debugging procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 36
16.6.2 Setting break points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 37
16.6.3 Setting break devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 41
16.6.4 Setting skip ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 43

A - 17
 16.6.5 Executing program one step at a time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 45
16.6.6 Executing program until condition is satisfied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 45
16.6.7 Canceling step execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 46
16.6.8 Setting options for step execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 47
16.6.9 Stopping step execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 48

16.7 Using QnUDVCPU & LCPU Logging Configuration Tool 16 - 49

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

17.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU 17 - 2

17.2 Operating Redundant CPUs 17 - 6

17.3 Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory 17 - 8

17.4 Clearing Programmable Controller Memory 17 - 10

17.5 Arranging Programmable Controller Memory 17 - 13

17.6 Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU 17 - 14

17.7 Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu 17 - 16

17.8 Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool 17 - 18

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU 18 - 2

18.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module . . 18 - 2
18.1.2 Diagnosing FXCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 7
18.1.3 Error icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 8
18.1.4 Online operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 9

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET 18 - 12

18.2.1 Network test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 14
18.2.2 Loop test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 16
18.2.3 Setting verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 17
18.2.4 Station order check test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 19
18.2.5 Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 20
18.2.6 Error history monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 22
18.2.7 Network monitor details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23
18.2.8 Monitoring other station information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 24

18.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network 18 - 26

18.3.1 Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 30
18.3.2 IP communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 31
18.3.3 Link start/stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 32
18.3.4 Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 34

18.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network 18 - 36

18.4.1 Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 41
18.4.2 IP communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 42
18.4.3 Cable test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 43
18.4.4 Link start/stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 44

A - 18
 18.4.5 Network event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 45
18.4.6 Reserved station function enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 47
18.4.7 Temporary error invalid station setting/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 48

18.5 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT 18 - 49

18.5.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 49
18.5.2 Loop test/transmission speed test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 55
18.5.3 Displaying logs of station information (status logging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 57
18.5.4 Creating check sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 59
18.5.5 Starting/stopping data link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 61

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet 18 - 62

18.6.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 62
18.6.2 Built-in Ethernet type CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 68
18.6.3 PING test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 75
18.6.4 Loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 80

18.7 Executing Sensor/Device Monitor 18 - 84

18.8 System Monitor 18 - 85

18.8.1 Checking module's detailed information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 95
18.8.2 Checking details of error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 98
18.9 Changing Modules Online 18 - 100

18.10 Built-in I/O Module Tools 18 - 102

18.10.1 Positioning monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 102
18.10.2 High-speed counter monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 103
18.10.3 I/O monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 104

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.1 I/O System Setting Function 19 - 2

19.1.1 Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2
19.1.2 Conditions and sequence actions for simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 4
19.1.3 Timing chart input and device value input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 6

19.2 Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function 19 - 7

19.3 Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function 19 - 8

19.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values 19 - 10

19.4.1 Setting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 11
19.4.2 Setting sequence actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 13

19.5 Setting Using Timing Charts 19 - 15

19.5.1 Setting in timing chart format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 16
19.5.2 Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 17
19.5.3 Registering devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 18
19.5.4 Setting timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 19
19.5.5 Setting number of scans of timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 22
19.5.6 Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 23
19.5.7 Displaying list of registered devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 24
19.5.8 Exchanging display positions of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 25

A - 19
 19.5.9 Changing display format of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 26

19.6 Performing I/O System Setting Function 19 - 27

19.6.1 Executing simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 27
19.6.2 Disabling simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 27

19.7 Monitoring I/O System Setting 19 - 28

19.7.1 Starting/stopping monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 28
19.7.2 Changing current value of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 29

19.8 Operating I/O System Setting Files 19 - 30

19.8.1 Creating I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30
19.8.2 Opening existing I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30
19.8.3 Saving I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30

20 PRINTING

20.1 Print Function 20 - 2

20.2 Setting Printer 20 - 4

20.3 Batch Printing Project Data 20 - 5

20.3.1 Setting printer for batch print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 7
20.4 Page Set Up for Batch Print 20 - 8

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print 20 - 10

20.5.1 Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 10
20.5.2 Setting batch print for cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 12
20.5.3 Setting batch print for PLC parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 13
20.5.4 Setting batch print for redundant parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 14
20.5.5 Setting batch print for network parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 15
20.5.6 Setting batch print for program settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 16
20.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 17
20.5.8 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 20
20.5.9 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 22
20.5.10 Setting batch print for ST programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 24
20.5.11 Setting batch print for Structured Ladder/FBD programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 25
20.5.12 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 26
20.5.13 Setting batch print for labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 28
20.5.14 Setting batch print for device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 29
20.5.15 Setting batch print for device memory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 30
20.5.16 Setting batch print for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 31
20.5.17 Setting batch print for TC setting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 32
20.5.18 Setting batch print for device list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 33
20.5.19 Setting batch print for cross reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 34
20.5.20 Setting batch print for statements/notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 35
20.5.21 Setting batch print for product information list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 36

20.6 Displaying Batch Print Preview 20 - 37

20.7 Printing Data Displayed on Screen 20 - 38

20.8 Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen 20 - 39

20.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 39

A - 20
 20.8.2 Setting print details for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 41

20.9 Previewing Print Images 20 - 42

20.10 Printing Examples 20 - 43

20.11 Considerations for Printing 20 - 51

21 SETTING OPTIONS

21.1 Basic Operations 21 - 2

21.2 Option Setting List 21 - 4

22 USING LIBRARIES

22.1 Libraries 22 - 2
22.1.1 FB libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 3
22.1.2 User libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 4

APPENDIX

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys App - 2

Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 2
Appendix 1.2 "Navigation Window" toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 6
Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 7
Appendix 1.4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 8
Appendix 1.5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 9
Appendix 1.6 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for executing sampling trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 9
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 10
Appendix 1.8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 20
Appendix 1.9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 21

Appendix 2 Simulation Function App - 22

Appendix 2.1 Supported CPU functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 22
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 25
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 41
Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 48
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 52

Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table App - 57

Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer App - 58

Appendix 4.1 Before using GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 58
Appendix 4.2 Supported CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 59
Appendix 4.3 Unsupported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 60
Appendix 4.4 Supported project types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 61
Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 62
Appendix 4.6 Using device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 66
Appendix 4.7 Using device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 66
Appendix 4.8 Using device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 66
Appendix 4.9 Using search/replace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 67

A - 21
 Appendix 4.10 Using online function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 68
Appendix 4.11 Using monitor/debug function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 69
Appendix 4.12 Using printing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 69
Appendix 4.13 Copying saved project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 70
Appendix 4.14 Using PLC type change function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 70
Appendix 4.15 Using program check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 70
Appendix 4.16 Using IC memory card function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 70
Appendix 4.17 Compatibility with GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 71
Appendix 4.18 Compatibility with GX IEC Developer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 72
Appendix 4.19 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 72
Appendix 4.20 Program titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 73

Appendix 5 Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications App - 74

Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 74
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU App - 77
Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 77
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 81

Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications App - 86

Appendix 8 Considerations When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format App - 97

Appendix 8.1 ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 98

Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names App - 100

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type App - 103

Appendix 10.1 Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types . . . . App - 104
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 106
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 110
Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 117
Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . App - 121
Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 124
Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to Process CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 126
Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 128
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 131
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 136
Appendix 10.11 Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU and
CC IE Field head module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 145
Appendix 10.12 Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU ⇔ FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 146

Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists App - 147

Appendix 11.1 Instruction conversion for Universal model QCPU ⇔ CPU other than Universal
model QCPU conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 147
Appendix 11.2 Instruction conversion for Redundant CPU ⇔ CPU other than Redundant CPU
conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 149

Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions App - 151

Appendix 13 Supported Versions of Modules App - 169

Appendix 14 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type App - 171
Appendix 14.1 Installing GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 171
Appendix 14.2 Installing GX Developer separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 172
Appendix 14.3 Utilizing programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type
in GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 173

A - 22
 Appendix 15 Considerations of Installation App - 174

Appendix 16 USB Driver Installation App - 177

Appendix 17 Considerations When Using English Version of GX Works2 App - 181

Appendix 17.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character
are applicable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 182
Appendix 17.2 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 185
Appendix 18 Considerations for Selecting Project Language App - 187

Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats App - 189

Appendix 19.1 Replacing instruction names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 190
Appendix 19.2 Adding devices/labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 191
Appendix 19.3 Changing positions of devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 193
Appendix 19.4 Changing arguments to constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 194
Appendix 19.5 Changing label data types to double-precision real number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 195
Appendix 19.6 Changing label data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 197
Appendix 19.7 Changing number of array elements of array data type labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 198
Appendix 19.8 Changing label data type to array data type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 199

INDEX

A - 23
 ■ MANUALS

Related manuals are separately issued according to the purpose of their functions in GX Works2.
● Related manuals
The manuals related to this product are shown below.
Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals.
1) Operation of GX Works2

Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
SH-080780ENG
Explains methods for such as creating and monitoring programs in Simple project of GX Works2.
(13JU64)
(Sold separately)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
SH-080984ENG
Explains methods for such as creating function blocks, pasting function blocks to sequence programs,
(13JU72)
and operating FB library in Simple project of GX Works2. (Sold separately)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
SH-080781ENG
Explains methods for such as creating and monitoring programs in Structured project of GX Works2.
(13JU65)
(Sold separately)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
SH-080921ENG
Explains methods of intelligent function module for such as parameter setting, monitoring programs,
(13JU69)
and predefined protocol support function in GX Works2. (Sold separately)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Simple Project)
SH-080787ENG
Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Simple project
(13JZ22)
for users inexperienced with GX Works2. (Sold separately)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Structured Project)
SH-080788ENG
Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Structured
(13JZ23)
project for users inexperienced with GX Works2. (Sold separately)

2) Structured programming

Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals)
SH-080782ENG
Explains the programming methods, types of programming languages, and other information required
(13JW06)
to create structured programs. (Sold separately)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
SH-080783ENG
Explains the specifications and functions of common instructions such as sequence instructions, basic
(13JW07)
instructions, and application instructions, that can be used in structured programs. (Sold separately)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Application Functions)
SH-080784ENG
Explains the specifications and functions of application functions that can be used in structured
(13JW08)
programs. (Sold separately)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Special Instructions)
Explains the specifications and functions of special instructions such as module dedicated instruction, SH-080785ENG
PID control instruction, and built-in I/O function dedicated instruction, that can be used in structured (13JW09)
programs. (Sold separately)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Device & Common]
JY997D26001
Explains the devices and parameters provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(09R925)
(Sold separately)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Basic & Applied Instruction]
JY997D34701
Explains the sequence instructions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(09R926)
(Sold separately)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Application Functions]
JY997D34801
Explains the application functions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(09R927)
(Sold separately)

A - 24
 3) Operation of iQ Works

Manual number
Manual name
(Model code)
iQ Works Beginner’s Manual
SH-080902ENG
Explains fundamental methods for such as managing the system using MELSOFT Navigator and using
(13JZ44)
system labels for users inexperienced with GX Works2. (Sold separately)

The Operating Manuals are included on the CD-ROM of the software package in a PDF file format. Manuals in printed
form are sold separately for single purchase. Order a manual by quoting the manual number (model code) listed in the
table above.

A - 25
 ● Purpose of this manual
This manual explains the functions that are common to Simple project and Structured project,
including system configuration, parameter settings, and operation methods for online functions of GX
Works2. Manuals for reference are listed in the following table according to their purpose.
For information such as the content and number of each manual, refer to the list of 'Related manuals'.
1) Installation of GX Works2 and USB driver

GX Works2 Version 1
Purpose GX Works2 Installation Instructions Operating Manual
Common
Learning the operating
environment and installation Details
method

Learning a USB driver installation

Details
method

2) Operation of GX Works2

GX Works2 Beginner's GX Works2 Version 1

Manual Operating Manual
Purpose Simple Project Intelligent
Simple Structured Structured
Common Function Function
Project Project Project
Block Module

Learning all functions of GX

Works2 Outline

Learning the project types and

available languages in GX
Outline
Works2
Learning the basic operations
and operating procedures when
Details
creating a simple project for the
first time
Learning the basic operations
and operating procedures when
Details
creating a structured project for
the first time
Learning the operations of
available functions regardless of Details
project type.
Learning the functions and
operation methods for Details Details
Outline
programming
Learning the operations and
operating procedures when Details

creating function blocks (FB) in

Simple project.

Learning data setting methods for

Details
intelligent function module

A - 26
 3) Operations in each programming language
For details of instructions used in each programming language, refer to the section 4 and the
section 5 on the following pages.

GX Works2 Version 1
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
Purpose Operating Manual
Simple Project Structured Project Simple Project Structured Project

Ladder Diagram Details

Outline

Simple Sequential *1
Details
Project Function Chart Outline

Structured Text Details

Outline

Ladder Diagram Details

Outline

Sequential *1
Details
Function Chart Outline
Structured
Project
Structured Ladder/
Details
FBD Outline

Structured Text Details

Outline

*1 : MELSAP3 and FX series SFC only

A - 27
 4) Details of instructions in each programming language (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

MELSEC-Q/L/F Manual
MELSEC-Q/L MELSEC-Q/L/QnA
Structured MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming for
Programming Programming
Programming Manual module to
Purpose Manual Manual
Manual be used
Common Special Application Common PID Control
Fundamentals SFC –
Instructions Instructions Functions Instruction Instructions
Learning details
of programmable
controller CPU
All
error codes, Details
languages
special relays,
and special
registers
Learning the
types and details
Details
of common
instructions
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for Details
intelligent
Using function modules
Ladder
Diagram Learning the
types and details
Details
of instructions for
network modules
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for Details
the PID control
function
Learning details
Using
of specifications,
Sequential
functions, and Details
Function
instructions of
Chart
SFC (MELSAP3)
Learning the
fundamentals for
creating a Details
structured
program
Learning the
types and details
Details
of common
instructions
Learning the
types and details
Using of instructions for Details
Structured intelligent Outline

Ladder/ function modules

FBD or
Structured Learning the
Text types and details
Details
of instructions for Outline
network modules
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for Details
Outline
the PID control
function
Learning the
types and details
Details
of application
functions

A - 28
 5) Details of instructions in each programming language (for FXCPU)

MELSEC-Q/L/F
Structured
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual FXCPU Programming Manual
Programming
Purpose Manual
Basic & FX0, FX0S, FX1S, FX1N,
Device & Application FX3G, FX3U,
Fundamentals Applied FX0N, FX1, FX2N, FX1NC,
Common Functions FX3GC, FX3UC
Instruction FXU, FX2C FX2NC
Learning the types
and details of basic/
Using application
Ladder instructions, Details Details Details
Diagram descriptions of
devices and
parameters
Using Learning details of
Sequential specifications,
Details Details Details
Function functions, and
Chart instructions of SFC
Learning the
fundamentals for
Details
creating a
structured program
Learning the
descriptions of
Using devices, Details
Structured parameters, and
Ladder/ error codes
FBD or
Structured Learning the types
Text and details of
Details
sequence
instructions
Learning the types
and details of
Details
application
instructions

A - 29
 ● How to read this manual

Supported CPU

Supported programmable
controller CPUs are shown in
icons under the section title.

Screen display

Describes the screen display

procedure.
Follow the and select
[(menu)] to open the screen.
*Screen display may differ
depending on the CPU type.
In that case, typical example is
described.

Display contents

Describes the display contents

on the screen.

Reference location

leads to the reference

location and reference manual.

Section title

Clarifies the section of currently 6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

open page.

Chapter heading

Index on the right of the page

number clarifies the chapter of
currently open page.

Screen button

Describes the buttons in the

screen.

Operating procedure

Describes the operating

procedure of the function.

A - 30
 The following table explains the CPU module icons that indicate the function availability.

Icon
QCPU Communication Description
LCPU Remote I/O FXCPU
(Q mode) head module
Normal icons indicate that the corresponding
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
function is available.
*1 *1 *1 *1 Icons with * (asterisk) symbol indicate that the
Q CPU L CPU – Head FX corresponding function is available with
restrictions such as CPU types.

Icons with × symbol indicate that the

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX corresponding function is not available.

This manual also uses the following columns:

This indicates notes requiring attention or useful functions relating to the information given on the
same page.

Restrictions

This indicates restrictions relating to the information given on the same page.

● Symbols used in this manual

The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples.

2
3
4

No. Symbol Description Example

 [ ] Menu name on a menu bar [Project]
 Toolbar icon
 (Underline) Screen name Q Parameter Setting screen
 Tab name in a screen <<PLC System>>
 " " Item name in a screen "Timer Limit Setting"

 Button on a screen button

–  Keyboard key 

A - 31
 ■ GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL

The following are the generic terms/abbreviations of such as software packages and programmable
controller CPUs used in this manual.

Generic term and

Description
abbreviation
GX Works2 Generic product name for SWnDNC-GXW2-E (n: version)
Existing application –
Generic product name for SWnD5C-GPPW-E, SWnD5C-GPPW-EA, SWnD5C-GPPW-EV, and
GX Developer SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA
(n: version)
Product name for SWnD5C-MEDOC3
GX IEC Developer
(n: version)
Generic product name for SWnD5C-LLT-E, SWnD5C-LLT-EA, SWnD5C-LLT-EV, and
GX Simulator SWnD5C-LLT-EVA
(n: version)
GX Configurator Generic product name for GX Configurator-AD/DA/SC/CT/TC/TI/FL/PT/AS/QP
Product name for the integrated development environment included in SWnDNC-IQWK (iQ Platform
MELSOFT Navigator compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
(n: version)
iQ Works Abbreviation for iQ platform supporting engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation for GX Works2 simulation function
Personal computer Generic term for personal computer on which Windows® operates
Q series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC-Q series
L series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC-L series
FX series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC-F series
Basic model QCPU Generic term for Q00J, Q00, and Q01
High Performance
Generic term for Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, and Q25H
model QCPU
Process CPU Generic term for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, and Q25PH
Redundant CPU Generic term for Q12PRH and Q25PRH
Generic term for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH,
Universal model QCPU Q04UDV, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV,
Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH
QnUD(H)CPU Generic term for Q03UD, Q04UDH, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q13UDH, Q20UDH, and Q26UDH
Generic term for Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDEH,
QnUDE(H)CPU
Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH
High-speed Universal
Generic term for Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, and Q26UDV
model QCPU
Built-in Ethernet port
Generic term for QnUDE(H)CPU and Universal model high-speed type QCPU
QCPU
Generic term for Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant
QCPU (Q mode)
CPU, and Universal model QCPU
LCPU Generic term for L02S, L02, L02-P, L06, L26, L26-BT, and L26-PBT
Generic term for FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC,
FXCPU
FX3U, and FX3UC
CPU module Generic term for QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and FXCPU
Built-in Ethernet type
Generic term for Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and LCPU
CPU
Display module A module with LCD to be mounted to LCPU
Generic term for the following:
Base unit/Block • base unit
• a composition of modules from the power supply module to the END cover in MELSEC-L series
FXGP(WIN) Abbreviation for SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

A - 32
 Generic term and
Description
abbreviation
Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, LJ71C24,
C24
and LJ71C24-R2
Generic term for A2A, A2A-S1, A3A, A2AP21/R21, A2AP21/R21-S1, A3AP21/R21, A2U, A2U-S1,
ACPU
A3U, A4U, A2US, A2US-S1, A2USH-S1, Q02(H)-A, and Q06H-A
QnACPU Generic term for Q2AS, Q2AS-S1, Q2ASH, Q2ASH-S1, Q2A, Q3A, and Q4A
Q series C24 Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, and QJ71C24N-R4
CC-Link IE Controller
Generic term for QJ71GP21-SX and QJ71GP21S-SX
Network module
CC-Link IE Field
Network master/local Generic term for QJ71GF11-T2, LJ71GF11-T2
module
CC IE Field head
Generic term for LJ72GF15-T2
module
SSCNET III/H head
Generic term for LJ72MS15
module
Communication head
Generic term for CC IE Field head module and SSCNET III/H head module
module
CC-Link IE Generic term for CC-Link IE Controller Network and CC-Link IE Field Network
MELSECNET/H network Generic term for QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11,
module QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15, and QJ71NT11B
QJ72LP25 Generic term for QJ72LP25-25 and QJ72LP25G
Remote I/O module Generic term for QJ72LP25 and QJ72BR15
Ethernet adapter module Generic term for NZ2GF-ETB
Ethernet adapter Generic term for FX3U-ENET-ADP
Q series-compatible E71 Generic term for QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, and QJ71E71
Generic term for AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2, A1SJ71QE71-B5, AJ71QE71N-T,
QE71 A1SJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,
AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71N3-T, and A1SJ71QE71N3-T
Generic term for AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-B2,
A series-compatible E71 AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-T,
AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N3-T, and A1SJ71E71N3-T
L series-compatible E71 Generic term for LJ71E71-100
Generic term for Q series-compatible E71, QE71, A series-compatible E71, and L series-compatible
Ethernet module
E71
CC-Link master/local
Generic term for QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N, and LJ61BT11
module
Q series CC-Link Generic term for QJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11N
CC-Link bridge module Abbreviation for AJ65SBT-CLB CC-Link - CC-Link/LT bridge module
CC-Link IE Field
Generic term for NZ2GF-CCB
Network bridge module
CC-Link IE Field
Network high-speed Generic term for NZ2GFCF-D62PD2
counter module
Simple motion module Generic term for QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16, QD77GF16, LD77MH4, and LD77MH16
Generic term for AJ65BT-G4(-S3) peripheral connection module and AJ65BT-R2N CC-Link system
G4 module
RS-232 interface module
QA extension base unit Generic term for QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA65, and QA68B
CC-Link IE Field
Network communication Generic term for GT15-J71GF13-T2
unit
MELSECNET/H board Generic term for Q80BD-J71BR11, Q80BD-J71LP21-25, and Q80BD-J71LP21G
CC-Link IE Controller Generic term for Q80BD-J71GP21-SX and Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX
Network board Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board
CC-Link IE Field
Abbreviation for Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network interface board
Network board

A - 33
 Generic term and
Description
abbreviation
Ethernet board Generic term for Ethernet cards for personal computer and Ethernet interface boards
CC-Link board Generic term for CC-Link Ver.1 board and CC-Link Ver.2 board
CC-Link Ver.1 board Generic term for A80BD-J61BT11 and A80BD-J61BT13
CC-Link Ver.2 board Generic term for Q80BD-J61BT11N
Generic term for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 series, GOT-A900 series, and
GOT
GOT-F900 series
Generic term for Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Operating System
Windows® XP
and Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition Operating System
Generic term for Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic Operating System,
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium Operating System,
Windows Vista® Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business Operating System,
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate Operating System,
and Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise Operating System
Generic term for Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter Operating System,
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium Operating System,
Windows® 7 Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional Operating System,
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate Operating System,
and Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise Operating System
MELSAP3 Abbreviation for the SFC function in MELSAP3 display format
Generic term for the SFC function in MELSAP-L (instruction format) and MELSAP-L (start conditions
MELSAP-L
format)
SFC Generic term for MELSAP3, MELSAP-L, and FX series SFC
Generic term for components (FB library, sample programs, drawing data) which provide easy
operation of programmable controller related modules and GOTs, and various devices that are
MELSOFT Library
connected to them
Contact your local Mitsubishi representative to obtain components of MELSOFT Library.

A - 34
■ TERMS

The following are the terms used in this manual.

Term Description
A compiled program created in a project with labels
Execution program
A program that can be executed on a programmable controller CPU
An actual device assigned to label after compiling a project with labels, or a device that is not
Actual device
described using a label
Generic term for sequence instructions, basic instructions, application instructions, data link
Common instruction instructions, multiple CPU dedicated instructions, and multiple CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instructions
Generic term for module dedicated instructions, PID control instructions, socket communication
Special instruction
function instructions, built-in I/O function instructions, and data logging function instructions
Simple project Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured Text
Without labels Generic term for projects created without selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects
With labels Generic term for projects created with selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects
Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured
Structured project
Text/Structured Ladder/FBD
Project without labels Generic term for Simple projects that do not use labels
Project with labels Generic term for Simple projects that use labels and Structured projects
Project with security Generic term for projects whose securities are set
New project creation with
data read from A function to create a new project with data read from a programmable controller CPU without
programmable controller opening a project
CPU
Direct connection A connection method using a USB/serial/Ethernet port of a programmable controller CPU
Stations other than the master station (local stations, remote I/O stations, remote device stations,
Slave station
intelligent device stations, etc.)
Redundant system A system configured using Redundant CPUs
Connective system A Redundant CPU selected on the Transfer Setup screen
Target system The other Redundant CPU connected to the connective system with a tracking cable
System A A system to which system A connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system
System B A system to which system B connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system
A system that performs program operation, system control, and network communication in the
Control system
redundant system
A backup system to continue system control in case of a module failure or an error in the control
Standby system
system in the redundant system
Backup mode A mode for normal operation of the redundant system
A mode for maintaining a system (partial modification of a program, replacement of modules
Separate mode mounted on the main base unit) without stopping the control during an operation of the redundant
system
Debug mode A mode for performing a debug using a single system prior to a redundant system operation

A - 35
MEMO

A - 36
 1

1.3
1.2
1.1

Features

List of Functions
Product Overview
This chapter explains an overview of GX Works2.
OVERVIEW

1-4
1-2

1-9

1-1
SCREEN
SETTING DEVICE SETTING DEVICE SETTING EDITING PROJECT CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM
INITIAL VALUES MEMORY PARAMETERS PROGRAMS MANAGEMENT BASIC OPERATIONS CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.1 Product Overview

GX Works2 is a programming tool for designing, debugging, and maintaining programs on Windows®.
GX Works2 has improved functionality and operability, with easier-to-use features compared to
existing GX Developer.

■ Main functions of GX Works2

GX Works2 can manage programs and parameters in units of projects for each programmable
controller CPU.
The following explains the main functions.
● Programming
Programs can be created in a Simple project in a similar way with existing GX Developer. Structured
programming in a Structured project is also available with GX Works2.

● Setting parameters
Programmable controller parameter and network parameter can be set with GX Works2.
Intelligent function module parameter can be set as well.

● Writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU

Created sequence programs can be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU using the
Read from PLC/Write to PLC function. Also, using the Online program change function, the
sequence programs can be changed even when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.

Reading data

Writing data

1-2
 1.1 Product Overview

● Monitoring/debugging 1
Created sequence programs can be written to the programmable controller CPU and device value at
operation can be monitored online/offline.

OVERVIEW
2

CONFIGURATION
Programs can be monitored and debugged.

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
● Diagnostics

SCREEN
The current error status and error history of the programmable controller CPU can be diagnosed.
Using the diagnostics function, the recovery work is completed in a short time.
Using the System monitor function (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU), detailed information on such as 4
intelligent function modules can be obtained. This helps to shorten the recovery work time at error
occurrence.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Diagnosing the programmable controller
CPU status (PLC diagnostics screen)

5
Diagnosing the
programmable controller
CPU status

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1-3
 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.2 Features
This section explains the features of GX Works2.

■ Project types in GX Works2

In GX Works2, the project type can be selected from either of Simple project or Structured project.
● Simple project
The Simple project creates sequence programs using instructions for Mitsubishi programmable
controller CPU.
Programs in a Simple project can be created in a similar way to existing GX Developer.
Programming without labels and label programming are supported as in GX Developer.

Program file

Program MAIN

Program SUB1

Program SUB2

Programs are created using programmable controller

CPU instructions.
Created programs can be operated as sequence Programming in a similar way with existing
programs. GX Developer is possible.

● Structured project
In a Structured project, programs can be created by structured programming.
By segmenting a whole control process program into common program parts, highly manageable
and usable programming (structured programming) is possible.
Only label programming is supported.

POU Program file

Function block 1 Program block A Program MAIN

Program block B
Function block 2
Program block C Program SUB1
Function 1 Program block D

Function 2 Program block E

Sequence programs are created

by combining POUs (Program
Organization Units).

1-4
 1.2 Features

■ Programming using labels 1

Using the label programming, programs can be created without regard for the device numbers.
By compiling a program created with the label programming, devices are automatically assigned and

OVERVIEW
the program becomes available as an actual program.

Created global labels can be utilized for other programs.

2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3
Created labels can be

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
utilized for other programs.

SCREEN
4
In addition, global labels can be registered as system labels and be shared within iQ Works compliant

MANAGEMENT
products (GX Works2, MT Developer2, and GT Designer3).
For details of system labels, refer to the following manual.

PROJECT
(iQ Works Beginner's Manual)

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1-5
 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

■ Enhanced use of program assets

Projects created with existing GX Developer can be utilized in a Simple project. Utilizing the past assets
improves the efficiency of program design.
<GX Developer> <GX Works2>

Project created
with GX Developer

Can be used in
GX Works2.

■ Sharing Program Organization Unit (POU) registered as libraries

In a Structured project, programs, global labels, and structures frequently used can be registered as
user libraries. Utilizing these user libraries reduces time required for creating programs.

Project A

Project B

Project C

Project D
Library file

1-6
 1.2 Features

■ Wide variety of programming languages 1

The wide variety of programming languages available with GX Works2 enables to select the optimum
programming language according to control.

OVERVIEW
<Ladder Diagram> <Sequential Function Chart>
Programming similar to existing GX Developer Programming to clarify the procedure
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
<Structured Ladder> <Structured Text>
Programming a ladder diagram graphically Programming in a text language similar to
C language
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
ST programs can be used on the ladder editor of GX Works2 using the Inline structured text function.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1-7
 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

■ Other features

● Offline debugging
Offline debugging using the simulation function is possible with GX Works2. This enables debugging
to ensure the normal operation of created sequence programs without connecting GX Works2 to the
programmable controller CPU.

Simulation function

Connecting to the Without connecting to the programmable controller CPU, programs can
programmable be monitored and debugged in the same way with debugging by the
controller is unnecessary. programmable controller CPU.

● The screen layout can be customized to the user's preference

Use dockable windows to change the screen layout of GX Works2.

Screen layout can be

changed.

1-8
 1.3 List of Functions

1
1.3 List of Functions
This section shows the list of functions of GX Works2.

OVERVIEW
The functions are divided into common functions available (Project, Online, Debug, Diagnostics, Tool,
Window, and Help) and functions used for each editing or setting target (Edit, Find/Replace, Compile,
and View).
For (Simple), (FB), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the 2
following manuals respectively:

CONFIGURATION
(Simple) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(FB) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)

SYSTEM
(Structured) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

3
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
project

SCREEN
This section explains the functions common to Simple project and Structured project.
4
■ List of common functions

MANAGEMENT
The following tables show functions that are available regardless of the type of editing or setting target.

PROJECT
Project (common function) Reference
New Create a new project. Section 4.2.1
Open Open an existing project. Section 4.2.2 5
Close Close the open project. Section 4.2.6
Save Save the project.
Section 4.2.3
Save As Name and save the project.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Compress/Unpack –
Compress Compress and save a project.
Section 4.2.4
Unpack Decompress a compressed project.
Delete Delete an existing project. Section 4.2.5 6
Verify Verify between two project data. Section 4.2.7
Project Revision –
PARAMETERS
Revision Entry Register the project change history. Section 4.6.1
SETTING

Revision List Display the list of project change history. Section 4.6.2
Change PLC Type Change the programmable controller CPU type. Section 4.2.8

Change Project Type

Change the project type from Simple project (without labels) to
Simple project (with labels), or from Simple project (with labels) Section 4.5
7
to Structured project.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1-9
 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Project (common function) Reference

Object –
New Add data to the project. Section 4.3.1
Rename Rename the selected data. Section 4.3.3
Delete Delete the selected data. Section 4.3.4
Copy Copy the selected data.
Section 4.3.2
Paste Paste the copied data.
Specify data in selected connection destination as a connection
Set as Default Connection Section 11.1.3
destination for regular use.
Property Display the selected data properties. Section 4.3.6
Intelligent Function Module –
New Module Add new intelligent function module data.
Delete Module Delete intelligent function module data.
Property Display properties of the intelligent function module data.
Save data of the positioning module selected on the Project
Save the Positioning Module Data
view to a file.
Read data from the positioning module and apply it to the (Intelligent)
Read from the Positioning Module Data
positioning module selected on the Project view.
Save the positioning module data in GX Configurator-QP
Save GX Configurator-QP Data
format.
Import GX Configurator-QP Data Read a project created with GX Configurator-QP.
Intelligent Function Module Parameter Display a list of set/unset parameters of the intelligent function
List module.
Open Other Data –
Open Other Project Open a project created with GX Developer. Section 4.7.1
Read ASC Format File Read an ASC format file. Section 4.7.2
Export to GX Developer Format File Save the open project in GX Developer format. Section 4.8
Library –
Create Create a new library. (Structured)
For Simple projects (with labels), import an FB library to the
(FB)
Install project.
(Structured)
For Structured projects, import a created library to the project.
Deinstall Delete the library from the project.
Reload Update the library imported to the project.
Rename Rename the library.
Open Enable editing of the library.
Close Disable editing of the library. (Structured)
Change Password Set a password for the library.
Save As Name and save the project.
Save Save the library file.
Help Display help information of the library.
Security –
Change Password Change the password of the current login user. Section 4.10.2
Manage user information of the project. Section 4.10.1
User Management
Add/delete a user, or change the user information. Section 4.10.2
Set the access authorization of each user related to reading/
Data Security Setting Section 4.10.4
writing data.
Manage the security key which is used to lock or unlock the
Soft Security Key Management Section 4.11
project.
Print Batch print multiple data in the project. Section 20.3
Print Preview Display the print preview of data to be batch printed. Section 20.6
Print Window Print the open screen. Section 20.7
Print Window Preview Display the print preview of the open screen. Section 20.9

1 - 10 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

 1.3 List of Functions

Project (common function) Reference

1
Printer Setup Change the printer settings. Section 20.2
Display the recently used GX Works2 project paths, and open
(Recently used files 1 to 4) –

OVERVIEW
the selected project.
Start GX Developer Start GX Developer from GX Works2. Section 4.9
Exit Exit GX Works2. Section 3.1

Edit (common function) Reference

2
Undo Restore the previous processing status.

CONFIGURATION
Redo Restore the processing deleted with [Undo].
Cut Cut the selected data. –

SYSTEM
Copy Copy the selected data.
Paste Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position.

3
Find/Replace (common function) Reference

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Cross Reference Display the usage of selected device or label. Section 10.1
Device List Display the usage of devices. Section 10.2
Find Device Search a device/label in the program. Section 10.3.1

SCREEN
Find Instruction Search an instruction.
Section 10.3.2
Find Contact or Coil Search a contact or coil corresponding to the specified device.
Find String Search a string. Section 10.3.3 4
Replace Device Replace a device/label in the program. Section 10.3.1

MANAGEMENT
Replace Instruction Replace an instruction. Section 10.3.2
Replace String Replace a string. Section 10.3.3

PROJECT
Change an open contact to a closed contact, or change a
Change Open/Close Contact Section 10.3.4
closed contact to an open contact.
Device Batch Replace Batch-replace devices with the specified device.
Register to Device Batch Replace Register selected devices on the Device Batch Replace screen.
Section 10.3.5 5

Compile (common function) Reference

PROGRAMS
Build Convert/compile a program being edited.

EDITING
Write sequence programs to a programmable controller CPU
Online Program Change Section 5.4
after the conversion/compilation.
Rebuild All Convert/compile all programs in the project.
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 - 11

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

View (common function) Reference

Toolbar –
Toolbar name Display/hide each toolbar.
Section 3.2.2
Display All Display/hide all toolbars.
Statusbar Display/hide the status bar. Section 3.2.6
Set the display color for characters such as labels and device
Color and Font Section 3.2.7
comments on the work window.
Docking Window –
Navigation Display/hide the Navigation window. Section 3.2.5
Display/hide the Function Block Selection window.
(FB)
Element Selection Select a part such as function block and function on the window
(Structured)
for utilizing it to a program.
Display/hide the Output window. (Simple)
Output
The conversion (compilation) result is displayed. (Structured)
Display/hide the Cross Reference window.
Cross Reference Section 10.1
The devices/labels used in the project are displayed.
Display/hide the Device List window.
Device Use List Section 10.2
The usage of selected device is displayed.
Display/hide the CC-Link Device Reference window.
CC-Link Device Reference Window Assignments of CC-Link refresh devices and link devices are Section 6.3.5
displayed.
Display/hide the Watch window.
Watch 1 to 4 Section 14.6
The monitoring result is displayed.
Intelligent Function Module Monitor –
Module 1 to 10 Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window.
(Intelligent)
Intelligent Function Module Guidance Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Guidance window.
Display/hide the Find/Replace window.
Find/Replace Section 10.3
The search/replace result is displayed.
Debug –
Break Point Display/hide the Break Point window. Section 16.6.2
Break Device Display/hide the Break Device window. Section 16.6.3
Skip Range Display/hide the Skip Range window. Section 16.6.4

1 - 12 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

 1.3 List of Functions

Online (common function) Reference

1
Read from PLC Read data from the programmable controller CPU.
Section 12.1
Write to PLC Write data to the programmable controller CPU.

OVERVIEW
Verify a project being edited against the data on the
Verify with PLC Section 12.2
programmable controller CPU.
Remotely control RUN/PAUSE/STOP of the programmable
Remote Operation Section 17.1
controller CPU from GX Works2.
Remotely control the system switch, operation mode change, or 2
Redundant Operation Section 17.2
memory copy on the Redundant CPU from GX Works2.

CONFIGURATION
Password/Keyword –
Section 13.2.1

SYSTEM
New Set a password/keyword to the programmable controller CPU. Section 13.3.1
Section 13.4.1
Section 13.2.2
Cancel the password/keyword set to the programmable
Delete
controller CPU.
Section 13.3.2
Section 13.4.2 3

CONFIGURATION AND
Section 13.2.3

BASIC OPERATIONS
Temporarily unlock the password/keyword set to the
Disable Section 13.3.3
programmable controller CPU.
Section 13.4.3
Manage the security key which is used to lock or unlock the

SCREEN
Soft Security Key Management Section 13.5
programmable controller CPU.
PLC Memory Operation –
Format PLC Memory Format the programmable controller CPU memory. Section 17.3 4
Clear PLC Memory Clear the programmable controller CPU memory. Section 17.4
Arrange PLC Memory Arrange the programmable controller CPU memory. Section 17.5

MANAGEMENT
Delete PLC Data Delete data on the programmable controller CPU. Section 12.3

PROJECT
PLC User Data –
Read Read the programmable controller CPU user data.
Write Write the programmable controller CPU user data. Section 12.5
Delete Delete the programmable controller CPU user data.
5
Copy the program memory data on the programmable
Export to ROM Format Section 12.4
controller CPU to ROM.

PROGRAMS
Transfer the content of program cache memory to program
Program Memory Batch Download Section 12.6

EDITING
memory in batch.
Latch Data Backup –
Back up device memory/file register/error history data to the
Backup Section 12.7.1
standard ROM. 6
Delete Backup Data Delete the backup data on the programmable controller CPU. Section 12.7.2
PLC Module Change –
Back up data on the programmable controller CPU to the PARAMETERS
Create Backup Data Section 12.8.1
SETTING

memory card.
Restore the backup data to another programmable controller
Restore Section 12.8.2
CPU.
Set Clock Set the clock on the programmable controller CPU. Section 17.6 7
Register/cancel menus to operate intelligent function module
Register/Cancel Display Module Menu Section 17.7
using the LCPU display module menu.
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 - 13

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Online (common function) Reference

Monitor –
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during
Monitor Mode
monitoring.
(Simple)
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)"
Monitor (Write Mode)
during monitoring.
Start Monitoring (All Windows) Start monitoring the programs of all open windows.
Section 14.8
Stop Monitoring (All Windows) Stop monitoring the programs of all open windows.
Start Monitoring Start monitoring the program of the open window. Section 14.2
Stop Monitoring Stop monitoring the program of the open window. Section 14.1
Display the current device value in decimal in program
Change Value Format (Decimal)
monitoring. (Simple)
Display the current device value in hexadecimal in program (Structured)
Change Value Format (Hexadecimal)
monitoring.
Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor device/buffer memory in batch. Section 14.3
Program List Monitor the processing time of programs being executed. Section 14.4
Interrupt Program List Monitor the number of executions of interrupt programs. Section 14.5
(FB)
Change Instance (Function Block) Select an instance of the function block to be monitored.
(Structured)
SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program.
Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when (Simple)
SFC Auto Scroll
they are out of the screen during monitoring.
Watch –
Start monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels
Start Watching
and intelligent function module.
Stop monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels
Stop Watching
and intelligent function module.
Bit Device Display Format
Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to
Numerical Display Section 14.6
the numerical display (1/0).
Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to
ON/OFF Display
the 'ON/OFF' display.
Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to
Symbol Display
the symbol display (/).
Register to Watch Register the selected devices/labels to the Watch window.
Read local device data from the programmable controller CPU
Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV Section 12.12
and saves them on a personal computer in CSV format.

Debug (common function) Reference

Start/Stop Simulation Start/stop simulation. Section 15.2
Display a list of the instructions and devices used in the
Instructions Unsupported by Simulation Section 15.3
program that is not supported by the simulation function.
For ladder and SFC (Zoom) programs, change the ON/OFF
Modify Value Section 16.1
status and values of devices and labels used in the program.
Forced Input Output Registration/
Register/cancel the forced input/output of the device 'X'/'Y'. Section 16.2
Cancellation
Device Test with Execution Condition –
Register Register the device test with execution condition. Section 16.3.1
Check/disable the registration of device test with execution
Registration Check/Disable Section 16.3.2
condition.
Batch Disable Batch disable the device test with execution condition in batch. Section 16.3.3
Sampling Trace –
Open Sampling Trace Display the Sampling Trace screen. Section 16.4.1
Scan Time Measurement Measure the scan time of a desired section. Section 16.5

1 - 14 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

 1.3 List of Functions

Debug (common function) Reference

1
Step Execution –
Stop Stop the step execution. Section 16.6.9

OVERVIEW
Cancel Cancel the step execution. Section 16.6.7
Break Execution Execute the break execution. Section 16.6.6
Step Execution Execute the step execution. Section 16.6.5
Execution Option Display the "Execution Option" screen of the step execution. Section 16.6.8 2
Break Setting –

CONFIGURATION
Set a break point at the cursor position, or cancel the set break
Set/Cancel Break Point
point.
Enable/Disable Break Point Enable/disable the break point at the cursor position.

SYSTEM
Section 16.6.2
Cancel All Break Points Cancel all break points.
Break Point Window Display the Break Point window.
Cancel All Break Devices Cancel all break devices.
Section 16.6.3
3
Break Device Window Display the Break Device window.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Skip Setting –
Set/Cancel Skip Range Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip range.

SCREEN
Enable/Disable Skip Range Enable/disable the skip range at the cursor position.
Section 16.6.4
Cancel All Skip Ranges Cancel all skip ranges.
Skip Range Window Display the Skip Range window.
4
Diagnostics (common function) Reference

MANAGEMENT
Diagnose the operating status of the programmable controller
PLC Diagnostics Section 18.1
CPU.

PROJECT
Ethernet Diagnostics Diagnose Ethernet. Section 18.6
CC IE Control Diagnostics Diagnose CC-Link IE Controller Network. Section 18.3
CC IE Field Diagnostics Diagnose CC-Link IE Field Network. Section 18.4
MELSECNET Diagnostics Diagnose MELSECNET/10(H). Section 18.2
5
CC-Link Diagnostics Diagnose CC-Link and CC-Link/LT. Section 18.5
Monitor the status of the equipment connected with

PROGRAMS
Sensor/Device Monitor Section 18.7
AnyWireASLINK or CC-Link.

EDITING
System Monitor Monitor the system status of the programmable controller CPU. Section 18.8
Online Module Change Change modules online. Section 18.9

Tool (common function) Reference

6
IC Memory Card –

PARAMETERS
Read IC Memory Card Read data from the IC memory card.
Section 12.11.1
Write IC Memory Card Write data to the IC memory card.
SETTING

Read from IC Memory Card Read data saved by the batch save function of programmable
(Edit and Data Copy) controller CPU from the IC memory card.
Section 12.11.2
Write to IC Memory Card
Write data to the IC memory card in the format which can be
used for the batch load function of programmable controller
7
(Edit and Data Copy)
CPU.
SETTING DEVICE

Check programs of the project without labels and display

Check Program (Simple)
errors.
MEMORY

Check Parameter Check parameters and display errors. Section 6.5

Clear All Parameters Delete all selected parameters. Section 6.7
Check duplications of devices assigned to global labels, and (Simple)
Check Device Duplication of Global Label
display the result. (Structured) 8
(Simple)
Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting Set device range to be automatically assigned to a label.
SETTING DEVICE

(Structured)
INITIAL VALUES

Block Password Set a block password to data. Section 4.12

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 - 15

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Tool (common function) Reference

Calculate the size of files to be written to the programmable
Confirm Memory Size Section 12.10
controller CPU.
Merge Data Merge ladder programs or device comment data. Section 4.3.5
Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem –
Line Connection Connect the line.
Section 11.10.2
Line Disconnection Disconnect the line.
Register a modem between a personal computer and a serial
AT Command Registration communication module, or a personal computer and an
FXCPU. Section 11.10.1

Phone Book Set phone numbers of targets such as remote access targets.
Options Set options for TEL data. Section 11.10.3
Logging Configuration Tool Start QnUDVCPU & LCPU Logging Configuration Tool. Section 16.7
Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool Start the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool. Section 17.8
Built-in I/O Module Tool –
Positioning Monitor Display the Positioning Monitor screen.
High-Speed Counter Monitor Display the High-Speed Counter Monitor screen. Section 18.10
I/O Monitor Display the I/O Monitor screen.
Check Intelligent Function Module Parameter –
Check duplications of devices set in the Auto refresh function
Check Auto Refresh Duplication (Intelligent)
and display the result.
Intelligent Function Module Tool –
Analog Module –
Offset/Gain Setting Configure the offset/gain setting of the analog module.
Q61LD Two-Point Calibration
Configure the Q61LD two-point calibration setting.
Setting
Q61LD Default Setting Configure the Q61LD default setting.
Create Wave Output Data Create waveform output data.
Temperature Input Module –
Configure the offset/gain setting of the temperature input
Offset/Gain Setting
module.
Temperature Control Module –
Execute the auto tuning function of the temperature control (Intelligent)
Auto Tuning
module.
Execute the sensor correction function of the temperature
Sensor Correction Function
control module.
Counter Module –
Preset Execute the preset function of the counter module.
QD75/LD75 Positioning Module –
Positioning Monitor Execute the positioning monitor.
Positioning Test Execute the positioning test.
Wave Trace Execute the wave trace.
Location Trace Execute the location trace.
Serial Communication Module – –
Circuit Trace Execute the circuit trace.
Predefined Protocol Support (Intelligent)
Start the predefined protocol support function.
Function
Language Selection Select a language used in the project. Section 3.3
Register profiles of CC IE Field modules and CC-Link modules
Register Profile Section 6.3.4
to GX Works2.
Key Customize Change the settings of the shortcut keys. Section 3.2.8
Options Set various options. Chapter 21

1 - 16 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

 1.3 List of Functions

Window (common function) Reference

1
Cascade Cascade windows.
Tile Vertically Tile windows vertically.

OVERVIEW
Tile Horizontally Tile windows horizontally.
Arrange Icons Arrange the icons at the bottom of the window.
Section 3.2.3
Close All Close all open windows.
(Switch to other window) Display the open window. 2
Display the list of open windows.
Other Windows

CONFIGURATION
Also, open or arrange specified windows.

Help (common function) Reference

SYSTEM
GX Works2 Help Display the GX Works2 Help screen. Section 3.4.1
Operating Manual –
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual 3
(Simple Project)

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
(Structured Project)
Operating Manual Common

SCREEN
Operating Manual (Simple Project) Display the operating manuals. Section 3.4.2
Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Operating Manual (Intelligent Function
Module)
4
Operating Manual (Simple Project,

MANAGEMENT
Function Block)
About Display product information such as the version. Section 3.4.3

PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 - 17

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

■ List of functions for setting labels

The following table shows the functions for setting and editing labels.

Edit (function for label setting) Reference

Delete Delete the selected data. –
Select All Select all items.
New Declaration (Before) Add a row above the cursor position.
New Declaration (After) Add a row below the cursor position. (Simple)
Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position. (Structured)

Read from CSV File Read label settings from the CSV file.
Write to CSV File Write label settings to the CSV file.
System Label –
Reserve the selected global label for registration as a system
Reservation to Register System Label
label.
Reserve the selected global label for deregistration of system
Reservation to Release System Label (Simple)
label.
(Structured)
Import System Label Import the system label information and apply it to global labels.
Apply the registration-reserved/deregistration-reserved global
Reflect to System Label Database
labels to the system label data base.
Confirm Update of System Label Apply system label information changed in another project to
Database global labels.
–
Execute Verification Synchronous with
Resolve a mismatch when system label information contains it.
System Label
Sort –
Class
Label Name
Data Type
Constant Sort the labels in ascending/descending order with the selected (Simple)
Device item. (Structured)

Address
Comment
Remark
Extract and display unused labels. (Simple)
Unused label list
Extracted unused labels can be deleted in batch. (Structured)

1 - 18 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

 1.3 List of Functions

■ List of functions for editing device comments 1

The following table shows functions for editing device comments.

OVERVIEW
Edit (function for editing device comments) Reference
Delete Delete the selected data. –
Select All Select all data being displayed. –
Import from Sample Comment – 2
Special Relay/Special Register Utilize sample comments of SM/SD. Section 9.5.1

CONFIGURATION
Intelligent Function Module Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module device. Section 9.5.2
Clear All (All Devices) Delete all device comment data. Section 9.3.1

SYSTEM
Clear All (All Displayed Devices) Delete all device comment data being displayed. Section 9.3.2
Read from CSV File Read device comments from the CSV file.
Section 9.6
Write to CSV File Write device comments to the CSV file.
Hide the bit-specified word device comment of the selected
3
Hide Bit Specification Information

CONFIGURATION AND
row.

BASIC OPERATIONS
Display the bit-specified word device comment of the selected
Show Bit Specification Information
row.

SCREEN
Cut The Range including Hidden Bit
Cut data including hidden bit-specified comment. Section 9.2.1
Specification Information
Copy The Range including Hidden Bit
Copy data including hidden bit-specified comment.
Specification Information 4
Paste The Range including Hidden Bit
Paste data including hidden bit-specified comment.
Specification Information

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 - 19

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

■ List of functions for setting device memory

The following tables show the functions for setting device memory.

Edit (function for setting device memory) Reference

Delete Delete the selected data. –
Insert Row Insert a row at the cursor position. Section 7.2
Input Device Enter a device. Section 7.2.2
Paste Text Enter a character string. Section 7.2.3
FILL Set the same value to consecutive devices simultaneously. Section 7.2.4

Find/Replace (function for setting device memory) Reference

Find Device Cell Search for a device. Section 7.3

View (function for setting device memory) Reference

Display Mode –
Binary Display data in binary.
Octal Display data in octal.
Decimal Display data in decimal.
Hexadecimal Display data in hexadecimal. Section 7.2.5
Float Display data in real number.
String Display data in character string.
String (ASCII only) Display data in ASCII string.
Register –
16-bit Display data in units of words.
32-bit Display data in units of double words. Section 7.2.5
64-bit Display data in units of 64 bits.
Setup Change the editor size. Section 7.2.6

Tool (function for setting device memory) Reference

Read device memory data from the programmable controller
Read Device Memory from PLC
CPU. Section 7.4.1
Write Device Memory to PLC Write device memory data to the programmable controller CPU.
Read from Excel File Read data from an Excel file.
Section 7.4.2
Write to Excel File Write data to an Excel file.

■ List of functions for verification result

The following tables show the functions for verification result.

Edit (function for verification result) Reference

Write to CSV File Write verification result to a CSV file. Section 4.2.7

Find/Replace (function for verification result) Reference

Next Unmatch Move to the next mismatched data.
Section 4.2.7
Previous Unmatch Move to the previous mismatched data.

View (function for verification result) Reference

Return to the <<Verify Result List>> tab from the <<Detail
Return to Result List
Verify Result>> tab.
Section 4.2.7
Close Detail Result Close the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab being displayed.
Close All Detail Result Close all <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs being displayed.

1 - 20 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

 1.3 List of Functions

■ List of functions for executing sampling trace 1

The following tables show the functions for executing sampling trace.

OVERVIEW
View (function for executing sampling trace) Reference
Result Position –
Move to Trigger Point Display the trigger position. –
Switching Display Items – 2
Device

CONFIGURATION
Address
Comment Display/hide the display item titles. Section 16.4.3

SYSTEM
Data Types
Radix
Timing Chart Scale –
Narrow Scale
3
Enlarge/reduce the timing chart scale. Section 16.4.4

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Wide Scale
Trend Graph Scale –
Narrow Scale

SCREEN
Wide Scale Enlarge/reduce the trend graph scale. Section 16.4.4
Initial Display
Additional Information – 4
Past Time Section 16.4.2
Display/hide the additional information.
Program Name Section 16.4.4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Debug (function for executing sampling trace) Reference
Sampling Trace –
Open Sampling Trace Display the Sampling Trace screen. Section 16.4.1
Display the screen on which the sampling trace conditions are 5
Trace Setting Section 16.4.2
set.
Start Trace Start sampling trace. Section 16.4.4

PROGRAMS
Stop Trace Suspend sampling trace. –

EDITING
Execute Manual Trigger Generate a trigger at any given timing. –
Write trace settings to the programmable controller CPU.
Execute this to control the sampling trace start by a sequence
Register Trace program. 6
Sampling trace starts when the Trace start command (SM801) Section 16.4.4
is executed after executing "Register Trace".

PARAMETERS
Forced Execution Registration Effective Enable to execute the sampling trace from the peripherals.
Display Trace Buffer Condition Display trace data storage status.
SETTING

Save the trace data (trace settings + results) on the personal

Export CSV Data
computer in CSV file format.
Read the sampling trace data (trace settings + results) from the
Read from PLC
programmable controller CPU.
Section 16.4.5 7
Write the trace data (trace settings + results) to the
SETTING DEVICE

Write to PLC
programmable controller CPU.
Delete all information including the device data registered and
MEMORY

Delete All Data the sampling trace result displayed on the Sampling Trace –
screen.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1 - 21

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram

The following tables show the functions for the ladder editor.

Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) Reference

Increment the device number of device in the cut/copied ladder
Continuous Paste
block and paste it consecutively.
Delete Delete the selected data.
Return the ladder program being edited to the last converted
Restore After Ladder Conversion
status.
Insert Row Insert a row at the cursor position.
Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position.
Insert Column Insert a column at the cursor position. (Simple)

Delete Column Delete the column at the cursor position.

NOP Batch Insert Insert an NOP in front of the ladder block at the cursor position.
NOP Batch Delete Batch-delete NOPs in the program being edited.
Edit Line Enter a line at the cursor position.
Delete Line Delete the line at the cursor position.
Change TC Setting Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program.
Ladder Edit Mode –
Read Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".
(Simple)
Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".
Ladder Symbol –
Open Contact Insert at the cursor position.
Close Contact Insert at the cursor position.
Open Branch Insert at the cursor position.
Close Branch Insert at the cursor position.
Coil Insert at the cursor position.
(Simple)
Application Instruction Insert at the cursor position.
Vertical Line Insert at the cursor position.
Horizontal Line Insert at the cursor position.
Delete Vertical Line Insert at the cursor position.
Delete Horizontal Line Insert at the cursor position.
Pulse Contact Symbol –
Rising Pulse Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Insert at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Branch Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Branch Insert at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close Insert at the cursor position. (Simple)

Rising Pulse Close Branch Insert at the cursor position.

Falling Pulse Close Branch Insert at the cursor position.
Invert Operation Results Insert at the cursor position.
Operation Result Rising Pulse Insert at the cursor position.
Operation Result Falling Pulse Insert at the cursor position.

1 - 22 1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram

 1.3 List of Functions

Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) Reference

1
Inline Structured Text –
Insert Inline Structured Text Box Insert an inline structured text box. (Simple)

OVERVIEW
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or
Display Template
control syntax.
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the
Mark Template (Left) (Structured)
left by selecting the menu each time.
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the 2
Mark Template (Right)
right by selecting the menu each time.

CONFIGURATION
Edit FB Instance Rename an FB instance name. (FB)
Documentation –

SYSTEM
Device Comment Edit device comments. Chapter 9
Statement Edit statements.
Note Edit notes. (Simple)
Statement/Note Batch Edit Batch-edit the statements/notes in the program.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
Easy Edit –

BASIC OPERATIONS
Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the right
Connect Line to Right-Side Symbol
of the cursor position.

SCREEN
Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the left
Connect Line to Left-Side Symbol
of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete HLine Rightward Enter/delete a line at the right of the cursor position. (Simple)

Enter/Delete HLine Leftward Enter/delete a line at the left of the cursor position.
4
Enter/Delete VLine Downward Enter/delete a line at the downward of the cursor position.

MANAGEMENT
Enter/Delete VLine Upward Enter/delete a line at the upward of the cursor position.
Switch Open/Close Contact Switch between an open contact and a closed contact. Section 10.3.4

PROJECT
Switch Statement/Note Type Change the type of the statement/note.
Display the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument is
Instruction Partial Edit
in the selected status.
Edit List for Ladder Block Display/edit the ladder block in list format. (Simple)
5
Read a list format program from a CSV file and display it as a
Read from CSV File
ladder program.

PROGRAMS
Write to CSV File Write a ladder program to a CSV file in list format.

EDITING
Find/Replace (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) Reference
Replace the start module I/O number of the buffer memory
Change Module I/O No.
address instruction. 6
Switch Statement/Note Type Change the type (PLC/Peripheral) of a statement/note.
Line Statement List Display a list of line statements used in the program.
PARAMETERS
Jump Move the cursor to the specified step position.
SETTING

Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next
Jump to Next Ladder Block Start
ladder block.
Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the
Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start
previous ladder block. (Simple) 7
Move the cursor to the same device as the one at the cursor
Next Device
SETTING DEVICE

position.
Move the cursor to the contact where the same device as the
Next Contact
MEMORY

one at the cursor position is used.

Move the cursor to the coil where the same device as the one
Next Coil
at the cursor position is used.

Back
Return the cursor to the previous position before the [Next
Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function execution.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram 1 - 23

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Online (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) Reference

Monitor –
Monitor Condition Setting Set a condition to start monitoring.
Monitor Stop Condition Setting Set a condition to stop monitoring.
(Simple)
Entry Ladder Monitor Register and monitor ladder blocks.
Delete All Entry Ladder Delete all registered ladder blocks.

View (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) Reference

Comment Display device comments or label comments. Chapter 9
Statement Display statements.
Note Display notes.
Open the Options screen and display/hide the lines of
Display Lines of Monitored Current Value
monitored current value.
Open the Options screen and set the display format for device
Display Format for Device Comment
comment.
Display Ladder Block
Hide Ladder Block Hide the ladder block at the cursor position.
Display Ladder Block Display the hidden ladder block at the cursor position.
Hide All Ladder Block Hide all ladder blocks.
(Simple)
Display All Ladder Block Display all hidden ladder blocks.
Device Display
Device Display Display the device assigned by compilation.
Batch-change the label display on the program editors to the
Batch Device Display
device display.
Cancel the device display on the program editors, and display
Cancel All Device Display
data in the format at the time of data entry.
Display the compilation result of the program on the inline
Display Compile Result
structured text box in a list format.
Zoom Change the display magnification of the ladder program.
Text Size –
Bigger Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen.
(Simple)
Smaller Reduce the text display size on the editing screen.
Open Other Windows –
Open Reference Window Open the reference window of the ladder editor.
Update Reference Window Apply the most recent ladder program to the reference window. (Simple)
Open Reference Source Window Display the source of the referenced ladder editor.
Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor
Tile FB Horizontally (FB)
horizontally.
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being
Open Label Setting
edited. (Simple)
Open Zoom SFC Block Display the SFC diagram of the Zoom editor window.
Move SFC Cursor –
Up Move the cursor on the SFC diagram upward.
Down Move the cursor on the SFC diagram downward.
Left Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the left. (Simple)
Right Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the right.
Open Instruction Help Display the Instruction Help screen.

1 - 24 1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram

 1.3 List of Functions

1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams 1

The following tables show the functions for editing SFC diagrams.

OVERVIEW
Edit (function for editing SFC diagrams) Reference
Delete Delete the selected data.
Arrange SFC Redisplay the SFC diagram. 2
Insert Row Insert a row at the cursor position.
(Simple)

CONFIGURATION
Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position.
Insert Column Insert a column at the cursor position.

SYSTEM
Delete Column Delete the column at the cursor position.
Edit Line –
Vertical Line Segment Insert at the cursor position.
3
Selection Divergence Insert at the cursor position.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Simultaneous Divergence Insert at the cursor position.
Selection Convergence Insert at the cursor position. (Simple)

SCREEN
Simultaneous Convergence Insert at the cursor position.
Delete Line Delete the line at the cursor position.
Change TC Setting Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program.
4
Ladder Edit Mode –
Read Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".

MANAGEMENT
(Simple)
Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".

PROJECT
SFC Step Attribute –
No Attribute Set the step attribute to No Attribute.
Stored Coil Set the step attribute to Stored Coil.
Stored Operation (without Transition
Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (SE).
5
Check) (Simple)
Stored Operation (with Transition
Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (ST).
Check)

PROGRAMS
Reset Reset the step attribute.

EDITING
SFC Symbol –
[STEP] Step Insert at the cursor position.
[B] Block Start Step (with END Check) Insert at the cursor position.
6
[BS] Block Start Step (without END
Check) Insert at the cursor position.
PARAMETERS
[JUMP] Jump Insert at the cursor position.
SETTING

[END] END Step Insert at the cursor position.

[DUMMY] Dummy Step (Simple)
Insert at the cursor position.
[TR] Transition Insert at the cursor position. 7
[--D] Selection Divergence Insert at the cursor position.
SETTING DEVICE

[==D] Simultaneous Divergence Insert at the cursor position.

MEMORY

[--C] Selection Convergence Insert at the cursor position.

[==C] Simultaneous Convergence Insert at the cursor position.
[ | ] Vertical Line –
Insert at the cursor position.
8
Sort the SFC step/transition numbers in ascending/descending
Sort SFC Step No. (Simple)
order.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Documentation –
SFC Step/Transition Comment Change to the SFC step/transition comment editing mode. (Simple)

1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams 1 - 25

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Find/Replace (function for editing SFC diagrams) Reference

Jump Move the cursor to the specified position.
Find Jump Step Move to the jump source step. (Simple)
Change SFC Step No. Replace the SFC step number.

Compile (function for editing SFC diagrams) Reference

Convert Block Convert a single block. (Simple)

View (function for editing SFC diagrams) Reference

Program Display Display MELSAP-L programs.
SFC Step/Transition Comment Display the SFC step/transition comments.
Zoom Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram.
Text Size
Bigger Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen.
Smaller Reduce the text display size on the editing screen.
SFC Row Setting Set the number of rows of SFC diagram. (Simple)

Open SFC Blocklist Display the SFC block list screen.

MELSAP3 Display Display SFC in MELSAP3 format.
MELSAP-L (Instruction Format) Display Display SFC in MELSAP-L (instruction format).
MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)
Display SFC in MELSAP-L (start conditions format).
Display
Open Zoom/Start Destination Block Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination block.
Back to Start SFC Block Display the SFC block of the start source.
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being –
Open Header
edited.

Online (function for editing in SFC diagrams) Reference

Monitor –
Monitor Condition Setting Set a condition to start monitoring.
(Simple)
Monitor Stop Condition Setting Set a condition to stop monitoring.

1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list

The following tables show the functions for editing SFC block list.

Find/Replace (function for editing SFC block list) Reference

Jump Move the cursor to the specified block number.
(Simple)
Block Information Find Device Search for a device.

View (function for editing SFC block list) Reference

SFC Block List Comment Display comments of the SFC block list.
Device Display Display devices.
(Simple)
Open SFC Body Open the SFC diagram.
Open Header Display the label setting editor.

1 - 26 1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list

 1.3 List of Functions

1.3.5 List of functions for editing in Structured Text 1

The following tables show the functions for the ST editor.

OVERVIEW
Edit (function for editing in Structured Text) Reference
Delete Delete the selected data. –

List Operands
Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an existing 2
label.

CONFIGURATION
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or
Display Template
control syntax.
(Structured)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the

SYSTEM
Mark Template (Left)
left by selecting the menu each time.
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the
Mark Template (Right)
right by selecting the menu each time.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
Find/Replace (function for editing in Structured Text) Reference

BASIC OPERATIONS
Jump Jump to the specified line. (Structured)
Bookmark –

SCREEN
Set a bookmark at the cursor line. The bookmark is deleted
Toggle Bookmark
when one is already set at the cursor line.
Bookmark List Jump to the specified bookmark from the bookmark list.
Next Bookmark Display the next bookmark position.
(Structured) 4
Previous Bookmark Display the previous bookmark position.

MANAGEMENT
Delete All Bookmarks Cancel all bookmarks.

PROJECT
View (function for editing in Structured Text) Reference
Display Compile Result Display the compilation result in a list format. (Structured)
Zoom –
5
Set Zoom Factor
Increase Zoom Change the display size of the program. (Structured)
Decrease Zoom

PROGRAMS
Zoom Header/Body –

EDITING
Header Open the label setting editor in the selected POU.
Body Open the program editor in the selected POU.
(Structured)
Open Header
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being 6
edited.

PARAMETERS
Online (function for editing in Structured Text) Reference SETTING

Monitor –
Start monitoring with the split window format that displays
Start Monitoring
monitor data of numeric value and character strings. (Structured)
Start Monitoring (Bit Type only) Start monitoring only bit type devices/labels. 7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.5 List of functions for editing in Structured Text 1 - 27

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD

The following tables show the functions for the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.

Edit (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD) Reference

Delete Delete the selected data. –
Select Mode Change to the contact and coil input mode.
(Structured)
Interconnect Mode Change to the line drawing mode.
Guided Mode –
Guided Editing Change to the keyboard input mode.
Overwrite the element entered in Guided editing at the cursor
Overwrite Mode
position.
Insert the element entered in Guided editing at the cursor
Insert Mode
position.
Line Mode Change the input format to draw lines in Guided editing.
(Structured)
Add a comment entry field at the start of the ladder block added
Auto Comment
in Guided editing.
Auto Connect Specify and connect the start and end points to draw a line.
Recalculate Line Arrange a line automatically to redraw it.
Insert Row Insert a row into the ladder program being edited.
Insert Column Insert a column into the ladder program being edited.
New Ladder Block List –
Top Insert a new ladder block at the start of all ladder blocks.
Insert a new ladder block in front of the ladder block being
Before
edited.
(Structured)
After Insert a new ladder block after the ladder block being edited.
Bottom Insert a new ladder block at the end of all ladder blocks.
Input Instruction Open the Input Instruction screen.
Ladder Symbol –
Open Contact Insert at the cursor position.
Close Contact Insert at the cursor position.
Coil Insert at the cursor position.
Jump Insert at the cursor position.
Return Insert at the cursor position.
Open Branch Insert at the cursor position.
Close Branch Insert at the cursor position.
Input Label Insert at the cursor position.
(Structured)
Output Label Insert at the cursor position.
Horizontal Line Segment Insert at the cursor position.
Vertical Line Segment Insert at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Insert at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close Insert at the cursor position.
Comment Insert a comment entry field at the cursor position.

1 - 28 1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD

 1.3 List of Functions

Edit (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD) Reference

1
Ladder Symbol –
Ladder Block Label Display the Ladder Block screen.
(Structured)

OVERVIEW
Left Power Rail Display/hide the left power rail.
Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an existing
List Operands (Structured)
label.
Number of Pins –
Increase the number of arguments of functions and function
2
Increment
blocks.

CONFIGURATION
Decrease the number of arguments of functions and function (Structured)
Delete
blocks.

SYSTEM
Ladder Block List Display a list of ladder blocks in a program.
Signal Configuration –
Configure Set the type of a contact and a coil.
Change the contact and coil type per execution in the following
3

CONFIGURATION AND
order. (Structured)

BASIC OPERATIONS
Toggle
• Contact: Open Contact → Close Contact
• Coil: Normal → Negation → Set → Reset

SCREEN
Find/Replace (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD) Reference
Jump Jump to the specified ladder block number. (Structured)
4
View (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD) Reference
View Mode –

MANAGEMENT
Label Display variables by its entered format.

PROJECT
Display devices/addresses in device format. Devices assigned
Device
to labels are displayed in device format.
Display devices/addresses in address format. Devices
Address
assigned to labels are displayed in address format. 5
Comment Display label comments.
Change Label-Device-Address Mode Switch the display format in order (label, device, address).

PROGRAMS
Change Label-Comment Mode Switch the display between label and comment.
(Structured)

EDITING
Batch-change all labels on the program editors to the device
All Device Display
display.
Cancel the device display on the program editors, and display
Cancel All Device Display
data in the format at the time of data entry. 6
Show a grid on the screen being edited to display the start/end
Grid
positions of a line.

PARAMETERS
Print Wrap Position Display the wrapping position for printing.
Display Compile Result Display the compilation result in a list format.
SETTING

Zoom –
Set Zoom Factor
Increase Zoom Change the display size of the program. (Structured) 7
Decrease Zoom
SETTING DEVICE

Zoom Header/Body –
Header Open the label setting editor in the selected POU.
MEMORY

Body Open the program editor in the selected POU.

(Structured)
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being
Open Header
edited.
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD 1 - 29

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field configuration window

The following tables show the functions for the CC IE Field configuration window.

CC IE Field configuration (function on the CC IE Field configuration window) Reference

Change Module –
Replace the general-purpose CC IE Field module to a specific
Replace General CC IE Field Module
module.
Section 6.3.2
Change the specific module to a general-purpose CC IE Field
Change to General CC IE Field Module
module.
Change Transmission Path Method –
Line/Star Change the transmission path method to line or star.
Ring Change the transmission path method to ring.
Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block
Supplementary Setting
data assurance per station, and operation setting for returning. Section 6.3.2
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the
Identical Point Assignment
total number of set stations.
Check –
Check whether the set equipment configuration of CC-Link IE
System Configuration
Field Network is correct.
Section 6.3.2
Parameter Processing of Slave Station Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station Perform commands on a slave station.
Discard the settings and close the CC IE Field configuration
Close with Discarding the Setting –
window.
Apply the settings and close the CC IE Field configuration
Close with Reflecting the Setting Section 6.3.2
window.

Edit (function on the CC IE Field configuration window) Reference

Copy Copy the information of the slave station of the selected row.
Paste the copied slave station to the last row of the list of
Paste
stations. Section 6.3.2
Select All Select all cells on the list of stations.
Delete Delete the slave station of the selected row.

View (function on the CC IE Field configuration window) Reference

Docking Window –
Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link IE Field
Module List
Network.
Section 6.3.2
Output Display/hide the Output window.
Supplementary Information Display/hide the Supplementary Information window.

1 - 30 1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field configuration window

 1.3 List of Functions

1.3.8 List of functions for CC-Link configuration window 1

The following tables show the functions for the CC-Link configuration window.

OVERVIEW
CC-Link configuration (function on the CC-Link configuration window) Reference
Change Module –

Replace General CC-Link Module

Replace the general-purpose CC-Link module to a specific 2
module.
Section 6.3.3

CONFIGURATION
Change the specific module to a general-purpose CC-Link
Change to General CC-Link Module
module.
Check –

SYSTEM
Check whether the set equipment configuration of CC-Link is
System Configuration Section 6.3.3
correct.
Online –
Apply the actual system configuration to the CC-Link
3
Detect Now

CONFIGURATION AND
configuration window.

BASIC OPERATIONS
Section 6.3.3
Parameter Processing of Slave Station Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station Perform commands on a slave station.

SCREEN
Discard the settings and close the CC-Link configuration
Close with Discarding the Setting –
window.
Close with Reflecting the Setting Apply the settings and close the CC-Link configuration window. Section 6.3.3
4
Edit (function on the CC-Link configuration window) Reference

MANAGEMENT
Copy Copy the information of the slave station of the selected row.
Paste the copied slave station to the last row of the list of Section 6.3.3

PROJECT
Paste
stations.
Select All Select all cells on the list of stations. –
Delete Delete the slave station of the selected row. Section 6.3.3
5
View (function on the CC-Link configuration window) Reference
Docking Window –

PROGRAMS
Module List Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link.

EDITING
Section 6.3.3
Output Display/hide the Output window.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.8 List of functions for CC-Link configuration window 1 - 31

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.9 List of functions for AnyWireASLINK configuration window

The following tables show the functions for the AnyWireASLINK configuration window.

AnyWireASLINK configuration (function on the AnyWireASLINK configuration window) Reference

Change Module –
Replace General AnyWireASLINK Replace the general-purpose AnyWireASLINK module to a
Module specific module.
Change to General AnyWireASLINK Change the specific module to a general-purpose (Intelligent)
Module AnyWireASLINK module.
Address Auto-Input Enter the address of the slave module automatically.
Check –
Check whether the set equipment configuration of
System Configuration (Intelligent)
AnyWireASLINK is correct.
Online –
Apply the actual system configuration to the AnyWireASLINK
Detect Now (Intelligent)
configuration window.
Parameter Processing of Slave Module Perform the parameter processing on a slave module.
Discard the settings and close the AnyWireASLINK configuration –
Close with Discarding the Setting
window.
Apply the settings and close the AnyWireASLINK configuration
Close with Saving the Setting (Intelligent)
window.

Edit (function on the AnyWireASLINK configuration window) Reference

Copy Copy the information of the slave module of the selected row.
Paste the copied slave module to the last row of module
Paste
information list. –
Select All Select all cells on the module information list.
Delete Delete the slave module of the selected row.

View (function on the AnyWireASLINK configuration window) Reference

Docking Window
Module List Display/hide the Module List window of AnyWireASLINK. –
Output Display/hide the Output window.

1 - 32 1.3.9 List of functions for AnyWireASLINK configuration window

 1.3 List of Functions

1.3.10 List of functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen 1

The following tables show the functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen.

OVERVIEW
Sensor/Device Monitor (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen) Reference
Close Close the Sensor/Device Monitor screen. –
2
View (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen) Reference

CONFIGURATION
Docking Window
–
Monitor Information Display/hide the Monitor Information window.

SYSTEM
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen) Reference
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station when
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
monitoring the sensors and equipment of CC-Link. 3
Perform commands on a slave station when monitoring sensors

CONFIGURATION AND
Command Execution of Slave Station

BASIC OPERATIONS
and equipment of CC-Link.
–
Perform the parameter processing on a slave module when
Parameter Processing of Slave Module
monitoring sensors and equipment of AnyWireASLINK.

SCREEN
Start Monitoring Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring Stop monitoring sensors and equipment.

4
1.3.11 List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
The following tables show the functions for the GX Simulator2 screen.

Tool (function on the GX Simulator2 screen) Reference

Backup Device Memory in Simulation – 5
Save Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation temporarily. Section 15.2.1
Read Read device memory/buffer memory saved temporarily. Section 15.2.2

PROGRAMS
I/O System Setting Execute simulation with the I/O system setting. Section 19.1

EDITING
Options (function on the GX Simulator2 screen) Reference

Start in minimized status

Start the GX Simulator2 screen in the minimized status at
starting simulation.
Section 15.2 6
Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation automatically
Save device memory at stop Section 15.2.1
at stopping simulation.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.10 List of functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen 1 - 33

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.12 List of functions for I/O system setting screen

The following tables show the functions for the I/O System Setting screen.

File (function for the I/O system setting) Reference

New Create a new I/O system setting. Section 19.8.1
Open Open an existing I/O system setting. Section 19.8.2
Save Save an I/O system setting. –
Save As Name and save an I/O system setting. Section 19.8.3
(Recently used I/O system setting files 1 to Display the recently used I/O system setting file names and
–
4) open the selected I/O system setting file.
Execute I/O System Setting Execute the I/O system setting and start simulation. Section 19.6.1
Disable I/O System Setting Disable execution of the I/O system setting. Section 19.6.2
Exit I/O System Settings Exit the I/O system setting. –

Edit (function for the I/O system setting) Reference

Cut Cut the selected data.
Copy Copy the selected data. Section 19.4.2
Paste Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position.
Delete Delete the selected data. –
Enable/Disable Setting –
Enable All Enable all I/O system settings.
Section 19.4
Disable All Disable all I/O system settings.

View (function for the I/O system setting) Reference

Toolbar Display/hide the toolbar.
–
Statusbar Display/hide the status bar.

Online (function for the I/O system setting) Reference

Set the target simulation with which the I/O system setting is
Target Simulator Setting Section 19.3
executed.
Start Monitoring Start monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.
Section 19.7.1
Stop Monitoring Stop monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.

Window (function for the I/O system setting) Reference

Cascade Cascade windows.
Tile Vertically Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen vertically.
Tile Horizontally Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen horizontally. –

Arrange the icons at the bottom of the I/O System Setting

Arrange Icons
screen.

1 - 34 1.3.12 List of functions for I/O system setting screen

 1.3 List of Functions

1.3.13 List of functions for predefined protocol support function 1

The following tables show the functions for the predefined protocol support function.

OVERVIEW
File (function of the predefined protocol support function) Reference
New Create a new protocol setting file.
Open Open an existing protocol setting file. 2
Close Close the open protocol setting file.

CONFIGURATION
Save Save the protocol setting file. (Intelligent)
Save As Name and save a protocol setting file.

SYSTEM
Print Print such as protocol setting.
Exit Exit the predefined protocol support function.

Edit (function of the predefined protocol support function) Reference 3

CONFIGURATION AND
Add Protocol Add a protocol.

BASIC OPERATIONS
Change the protocol selected from the predefined protocol
Change to Editable Protocol
library to an editable one.

SCREEN
Set the protocol detailed setting such as the number of retries
Protocol Detailed Setting of protocol transmission and whether to clear OS area (receive
data area).
Add Receive Packet Add a receive packet. 4
Delete Delete the protocol.
(Intelligent)
Copy Copy the protocol.

MANAGEMENT
Paste Paste the protocol.

PROJECT
Delete Multiple Protocols Batch-delete multiple protocols.
Copy Multiple Protocols Batch-copy multiple protocols.
Paste Multiple Protocols Batch-paste multiple protocols.
Device Batch Setting Batch-set devices used in the protocol. 5
Save User Protocol Library Save the set protocol as a user protocol library.

PROGRAMS
Module Read/Write (function of the predefined protocol support function) Reference

EDITING
Read from Module Read protocol settings from the module.
Write to Module Write registered protocol settings to the module.
(Intelligent)
Module Verification
Compare protocol settings being opened with those written in
the module.
6

Tool (function of the predefined protocol support function) Reference

PARAMETERS
Setting Device List Display the list of devices used in protocols.
SETTING

Import predefined protocol library provided by Mitsubishi (Intelligent)

Register Predefined Protocol Library
Electric Corporation.

Debugging Support Function (function of the predefined protocol support function) Reference 7
Module Selection Select a module to be debugged.
SETTING DEVICE

Display the protocol execution logs and the protocol execution

Protocol Execution Log
results.
(Intelligent)
MEMORY

Monitor signals, communication error information, operation

State Monitor setting switches, and protocol execution status of the Q series
C24N/L series C24 module.

8
Window (function of the predefined protocol support function) Reference
SETTING DEVICE

Cascade Cascade windows.

INITIAL VALUES

Tile Horizontally Tile windows horizontally. (Intelligent)

(Switch to other window) Display the open window.

1.3.13 List of functions for predefined protocol support function 1 - 35

 GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

MEMO

1 - 36
 1

OVERVIEW
2 SYSTEM 2
CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
This chapter explains the system configuration, configuration devices, and supported languages of
GX Works2.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port 2-2

MANAGEMENT
2.2 Connection from I/F Boards 2 - 13

PROJECT
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules 2 - 15

2.4 System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal 5

Computer 2 - 19

2.5 Supported Programming Languages 2 - 20

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2-1
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

The following shows the possible system configuration for connecting to the programmable
controller CPU using the USB/serial port of a personal computer.
For ACPU, use GX Developer. For details of the use of ACPU, refer to Appendix 14.
Programmable controller
direct connection
*1
(USB communication)
QCPU (Q mode)/
GX Works2 USB Cable
Remote I/O module
(SW1DNC-GXW2-E)
LCPU/
Communication
*2
head module
*2
FXCPU
USB Cable (FX3U/FX3UC)

*3
FXCPU
USB Cable
Programmable controller (FX3G/FX3GC)
direct connection
*4
(Serial port communication)
QCPU (Q mode)/
QC30R2
Remote I/O module
*4
*4

QC30R2 LCPU

RS-232 adapter
*5

Converter/Cable FXCPU
*6
*5
FXCPU
Converter/Cable (FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3G/
FX3U/FX3UC)
*7
*7 FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/
Cable FX2NC/FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/
FX3UC)
*8 FXCPU
(FX0/FX0S/FX1S/FX0N/
Converter/Cable
FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/FX2NC/
*6 FX3U/FX3UC)
*8
FXCPU
Converter/Cable (FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3U/
FX3UC)

*1 : Section 2.1.1
*2 : Section 2.1.2
*3 : Section 2.1.3
*4 : Section 2.1.4
*5 : Section 2.1.5
*6 : Section 2.1.6
*7 : Section 2.1.7
*8 : Section 2.1.8

2-2
 2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

Via Serial communication

1
RS-232 QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module
C24

OVERVIEW
LCPU/
GX Works2 CC IE Field
(SW1DNC-GXW2-E) head module

*1
Via CC-Link(G4)
2
QCPU (Q mode)/
Converter/Cable CC-Link Remote I/O module
G4 module

CONFIGURATION
LCPU/
CC IE Field
head module

SYSTEM
Via MELSECNET/H
Converter/Cable

Remote station Remote module Control station

3
Modem

CONFIGURATION AND
Via modem

BASIC OPERATIONS
Cable included in modem package

SCREEN
Modem

Cable included in modem package QCPU (Q mode)

C24
4
LCPU
*2

MANAGEMENT
FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/

PROJECT
FX2NC/FX3G/FX3U/FX3GC/
FX3UC)
*3
Via GOT
Cable QCPU (Q mode)/

GOT
Remote I/O module
5
LCPU/
CC IE Field
head module

PROGRAMS
FXCPU

EDITING
*1 : Section 2.1.9
*2 : Section 2.1.10
*3 : Section 2.1.11 6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2-3
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.1 USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and

communication head module)

The following table shows USB cables and USB adapters whose operations have been confirmed by
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Product name Model Manufacturer

USB cable
AU230 BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC.
(USB A type - USB B type)*1
KU-AMB530 SANWA SUPPLY INC.
USB cable U2C-M30BK ELECOM Co., Ltd.
(USB A type - USB miniB type)*2 MR-J3USBCBL3M Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
GT09-C30USB-5P Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.
*1 : For QCPU (Q mode) only
*2 : For Universal model QCPU/LCPU/communication head module only

● Using a USB cable for the first time

Install the USB driver. (Appendix 16)
● Considerations and restrictions
For the considerations and restrictions when accessing a programmable controller CPU, refer to Section 11.11.
● Using a USB/RS-232 conversion cable
For checking the COM port number as connecting a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU using such
as USB/RS-232 conversion cable, refer to the user's manual of each cable.

■ Configurations for USB connection

Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable.
Connection to a programmable controller CPU is not applicable to the configuration examples below.

<Inapplicable configurations>

Connection to several programmable controller CPUs from the personal

computer with several USB ports

Programmable controller CPU

USB cable

USB
cab
le Programmable controller CPU

Connection to several programmable controller CPUs via USB hub

Programmable controller CPU

USB cable USB cable

USB hub
USB
cab
le Programmable controller CPU

2-4 2.1.1 USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module)
 2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

2.1.2 USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with 1

FX3U/FX3UC)

OVERVIEW
FX3U-USB-BD USB cable (included)

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
● Using a USB cable for the first time
• Install the driver from the CD-ROM included with FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD. 3
• GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and assigns a serial COM

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
port number.
● Considerations and restrictions
• For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX3U-USB-BD, refer to the user's manual included.

SCREEN
• When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate
Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2) combo box is 4
displayed. Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

2.1.3 USB cables (compatible with FX3G and FX3GC)

7
For details of cables, refer to the following manuals.
SETTING DEVICE

FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual [Hardware Edition]

FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User's Manual [Hardware Edition]
MEMORY

Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable.
(Section 2.1.1 "■ Configurations for USB connection")

8
SETTING DEVICE

● Using a USB cable for the first time

INITIAL VALUES

Install the USB driver. (Appendix 16)

GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and configures a USB.

2.1.2 USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC) 2-5
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.4 RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and

remote I/O module)

The following table shows RS-232 cables whose operations have been confirmed at Mitsubishi Electric.
LCPU can be connected with an RS-232 adapters (L6ADP-R2).

Model Product name

QC30R2
(Personal computer connector: 9-pin D-sub connector)
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation RS-232 cable

● High-speed communication
For high-speed communication (transmission speed: 115.2/57.6kbps), use a personal computer compatible with high-
speed communication.
When a communication error occurs, retry the communication after reducing the transmission speed setting.

2.1.5 Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with

FXCPU)

RS-232/RS-422 Programmable controller CPU side

Personal computer side (RS-232 cable)
converter (RS-422 cable)
For FX1/FXU/FX2C

F2-232CAB
(25-pin D-sub↔25-pin D-sub)
FX-422CAB (0.3 m)
FX-422CAB-150 (1.5 m)
FX-232AW
F2-232CAB-1 For FX0/FX0S/FX0N/FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/FX2NC/
(9-pin D-sub↔25-pin D-sub) FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC

F2-232CAB-2 FX-232AWC FX-422CAB0 (1.5 m)

(Half pitch↔25-pin D-sub)

–
AC30N2A(25-pin↔25-pin)

FX-232AWC-H

● Transmission speed
When connecting to FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC using FX-232AWC-H, select any of 9.6kbps, 19.2kbps, 38.4kbps,
57.6kbps, or 115.2kbps for the transmission speed.
When connecting using FX-232AWC or FX-232AW, select either 9.6kbps or 19.2kbps for the transmission speed.
● Connecting to FXCPU
Be sure to use equipment shown in the table when connecting to FXCPU.

2-6 2.1.4 RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module)
 2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

■ Considerations for using RS-422 interface cables/converters 1

For the specifications of an RS-422 interface conversion cable/converter and the considerations for
using them, please read the following instructions as well as the manuals of each product for correct

OVERVIEW
handling.
● Connecting/disconnecting the conversion cable/converter
When connecting/disconnecting a peripheral device, conversion cable or converter to/from the RS- 2
422 interface, be sure to touch a grounding strap or grounded metal to discharge static electricity

CONFIGURATION
stored in the cable or in your body before the operation, regardless of whether electricity is being
supplied or not. After doing this, follow the procedure below.
Turn the programmable controller CPU OFF before connecting/disconnecting a conversion cable/

SYSTEM
converter that receives 5VDC power supply from the RS-422 interface.

Operation 3
1. Turn OFF the personal computer.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Turn OFF the conversion cable/converter. Ground the FG terminal if provided.
3. Connect/disconnect the conversion cable/converter to/from the personal computer and

SCREEN
the programmable controller CPU.
4. Turn ON the conversion cable/converter.
4
5. Turn ON the personal computer.
6. Start up the software package.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible
with FXCPU) 5

The following table shows the compatibility of FXCPU with function expansion boards.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Series Function expansion board
FX3U,
FX3U-422-BD
FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 only)
FX3G FX3G-422-BD 6
FX2N FX2N-422-BD
FX1S, FX1N FX1N-422-BD
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU) 2-7
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

● PLC parameter
When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate
Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2)
combo box is displayed.
Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.

2-8 2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU)
 2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion 1

boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)

OVERVIEW
The following table shows the compatibility of RS-232 cables with function expansion boards and
special adapters according to the shape and pin configuration of the serial port of the personal
computer.
2
Serial port shape of
Series Function expansion board and special adapter RS-232 cable

CONFIGURATION
personal computer
FX3U-232-BD*1
FX3U, FX3UC FX-232CAB-1

SYSTEM
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD*3
FX3G, FX3GC FX-232CAB-1
FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD F2-232CAB-1
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
FX2N FX2N-232-BD
9-pin D-sub FX-232CAB-1
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX0N-232ADP F2-232CAB-1

SCREEN
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX2NC-232ADP FX-232CAB-1
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD F2-232CAB-1
FX1S, FX1N FX1N-232-BD
FX-232CAB-1
4
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX3U-232-BD*1

MANAGEMENT
FX3U, FX3UC FX-232CAB-2
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP

PROJECT
FX3G-232-BD*3
FX3G, FX3GC FX-232CAB-2
FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD F2-232CAB-2
5
FX2N FX2N-232-BD
Half pitch 14-pin FX-232CAB-2
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX0N-232ADP F2-232CAB-2

PROGRAMS
FX1NC, FX2NC

EDITING
FX2NC-232ADP FX-232CAB-2
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD F2-232CAB-2
FX1S, FX1N FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX-232CAB-2
6
FX3U-232-BD*1
FX3U, FX3UC F2-232CAB-1
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
PARAMETERS
FX3G-232-BD*3
SETTING

FX3G, FX3GC F2-232CAB-1

FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD F2-232CAB

25-pin D-sub
FX2N FX2N-232-BD
F2-232CAB-1
7
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
SETTING DEVICE

FX0N-232ADP F2-232CAB
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX2NC-232ADP F2-232CAB-1
MEMORY

FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD F2-232CAB

FX1S, FX1N FX1N-232-BD
F2-232CAB-1
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
*1 : For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable. 8
*2 : '***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, CNV, or 8AV.
SETTING DEVICE

Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD) is not required for FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) series.
INITIAL VALUES

*3 : FX3GC series are not connectable.

*4 : ADP (FX3G-CNV-ADP) for FX3U adapter connection is not required for FX3GC series.

2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU) 2-9
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

● PLC parameter
When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate
Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2)
combo box is displayed.
• FX3U/FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2) series
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-CNV-BD, specify 'CH1'
and check the setting.
When using FX3U-232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3U-CNV-BD, or when using the second
adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-CNV-BD, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
• FX3UC (D, DS, DSS)/FX3GC series
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) or FX3GC series, specify
'CH1' and check the setting.
When using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
• FX3G series (14-/24-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify 'CH1' and check the setting.
• FX3G series (40-/60-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify 'CH1' and check the setting. In this case, when using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is
connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
When using FX3G-232-BD and FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify 'CH1' and check the
setting of FX3U-232ADP, and specify 'CH2' and check the setting of FX3G-232-BD.

2 - 10 2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
 2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

2.1.8 Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with 1

FXCPU)

OVERVIEW
FX-USB-AW USB cable (included)

CONFIGURATION
● Using a USB cable for the first time

SYSTEM
• Install the driver from the CD-ROM included with FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD.
• GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and assigns a serial COM
port number.
3
● Considerations and restrictions

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
• For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX-USB-AW, refer to the user's manual included.

SCREEN
2.1.9 Connection via AJ65BT-R2N
4
Use an RS-232 cable complies with the RS-232 standard within 15m.
For details, refer to the following manual.

MANAGEMENT
CC-Link System RS-232 Interface Module User's Manual (MELSOFT Connection Mode)

PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.1.8 Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU) 2 - 11

 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.10 Function expansion board (special adapter)

Programmable controller side

connector shape of cable Series Function expansion board and special adapter
included in modem package
FX3U-232-BD*1
FX3U, FX3UC
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G-232-BD*3
FX3G, FX3GC
FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
9-pin D-sub FX2N-232-BD
FX2N
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX1NC, FX2NC FX2NC-232ADP
FX1N-232-BD
FX1S, FX1N
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2N FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
25-pin D-sub FX1NC, FX2NC FX0N-232ADP
FX1S, FX1N FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
*1 : For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable.
*2 : '***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, CNV, or 8AV.
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD) is not required for FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) series.
*3 : FX3GC series are not connectable.
*4 : ADP (FX3G-CNV-ADP) for FX3U adapter connection is not required for FX3GC series.

Set "MODEM Initialized" on the <<PLC System (1)>> tab of PLC parameter according to the modem.
For details, refer to Section 11.10.

2.1.11 Connection via GOT

The use of the transparent function of GOT enables the access to a programmable controller CPU via
GOT. (Section 11.9)

2 - 12 2.1.10 Function expansion board (special adapter)

 2.2 Connection from I/F Boards

1
2.2 Connection from I/F Boards
*1

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

*1 : CC IE Field head module only

The following shows the system configuration for connecting to a programmable controller CPU
using an I/F board installed on the personal computer.
2
For the methods for installing an I/F board and installing the driver, refer to the manual of each I/F

CONFIGURATION
board.

SYSTEM
*1

MELSECNET/H board

Driver
3
QCPU
SW0DNC-MNETH-B
Q80BD-J71BR11 (Coaxial loop)
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 (Optical loop)

CONFIGURATION AND
Programmable controller

BASIC OPERATIONS
Q80BD-J71LP21G (Optical loop) on another station
CC-Link IE Controller Network board
Driver QCPU

SCREEN
SW1DNC-MNETG-B
A80BDE-J61BT13 (Optical loop)
A80BDE-J61BT11 (Optical loop) Programmable controller
GX Works2 on another station
(SW1DNC-GXW2-E) CC-Link IE Field Network board
QCPU
4
Driver
SW1DNC-CCIEF-J

MANAGEMENT
Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 Programmable controller
on another station

PROJECT
LCPU/
CC IE Field
head module
*1 Programmable controller
on another station
CC-Link Ver.1 board 5
Driver QCPU
SW4DNF-CCLINK-B
A80BD-J61BT11
Programmable controller

PROGRAMS
A80BD-J61BT13 on another station

EDITING
LCPU

Programmable controller
on another station
6
*1

CC-Link Ver.2 board

Driver QCPU
SW1DNC-CCBD2-B
Q80BD-J61BT11N Programmable controller PARAMETERS
SETTING

on another station

LCPU

Programmable controller
on another station 7
Ethernet board Driver
SETTING DEVICE

Driver supplied QCPU

with commercially
Ethernet board built-in a personal available
computer/commercially available Ethernet board Programmable controller
MEMORY

on host/another station

LCPU

8
Programmable controller
on host/another station
FXCPU
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Programmable controller
on host/another station

*1 : Section 2.2.1

2 - 13
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.2.1 I/F boards

This section explains applications of I/F boards.

For details, refer to the manual of each I/F board.

■ MELSECNET/H board

• For accessing Process CPU, use SW0DNC-MNETH-B version E or later.

• For accessing Redundant CPU, use SW0DNC-MNETH-B version K or later.

■ CC-Link Ver.1 board

• A80BD-J61BT11 can be used as a master or local station.

• A80BD-J61BT13 can be used as a local station.
• For accessing Process CPU, use SW4DNF-CCLINK-B version C or later.
• Set the board as a local station when connecting a Redundant CPU.
Use SW4DNF-CCLINK-B version G or later.

■ CC-Link Ver.2 board

• Q80BD-J61BT11N can be used as a master or local station.

• Set the board as a local station when connecting a Redundant CPU.
• Use the communication driver SW1DNC-CCBD2-B version 1.04E or later for Windows Vista®, and
version 1.08J or later for Windows® 7.

2 - 14 2.2.1 I/F boards

 2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules

1
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains details of the modules that can be connected from the USB port, serial port, and
each I/F board.
2
Modules connectable from USB port

CONFIGURATION
■

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the USB port.

SYSTEM
● Q series, L series

Programmable controller series Module model

3
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02H, Q02PH, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV,

CONFIGURATION AND
Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06H, Q06PH, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH,

BASIC OPERATIONS
Q series Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q12H, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q13UDH,
Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q25H, Q25PH, Q25PRH,
Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH

SCREEN
L series L02S, L02, L02-P, L06, L26, L26-BT, L26-PBT, LJ72GF15-T2, LJ72MS15

● FX series
4
Connection
Module name Module model
route

MANAGEMENT
FX-USB-AW*1 FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3U, FX3UC
Programmable controller

PROJECT
main unit USB direct
FX3G, FX3GC
connection
USB direct
USB expansion board FX3U-USB-BD
connection*1 5
*1 : As FXCPU uses the serial ⇔ USB conversion driver software, specify the COM port number of the RS-232 in the
connection destination setting.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2 - 15
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

■ Modules connectable from serial port

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the serial port.

Programmable
Module name Module model
controller series
Q00J, Q00UJ, Q00, Q00U, Q01, Q01U, Q02(H), Q02PH, Q02U,
Programmable controller CPU Q03UD, Q04UDH, Q06H, Q06PH, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q12H,
module Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q13UDH, Q20UDH, Q25H, Q25PH, Q25PRH,
Q26UDH

Q series QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,

Serial communication module*1
QJ71C24N-R4
MELSECNET/H network
QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
remote I/O module
G4 module AJ65BT-G4-S3, AJ65BT-R2N
Programmable controller CPU
L02S, L02*2, L02-P*2, L06*2, L26*2, L26-BT*2, L26-PBT*2
module
L series
Serial communication module*1 LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
G4 module AJ65BT-G4-S3, AJ65BT-R2N
Programmable controller main FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC,
FX series*3
unit FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
*1 : When accessing the programmable controller CPU from a personal computer via serial communication modules, note that
modules that can be connected to the personal computer are limited.
Even if a module cannot be directly connected to the personal computer, it may be usable as the nth module in multi-drop
connection.
For details of the multi-drop connection, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic)
MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic)

<Q series>
: Applicable ×: Not applicable

Multi-drop connection
Model Interface 1:1 system configuration
1st module nth module
QJ71C24N CH1 RS-232   ×
QJ71C24 CH2 RS-422/485 × × 
CH1 RS-232  × ×
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24-R2 
CH2 RS-232 × ×
(Function version B or later)
CH1 RS-422/485 × × ×
QJ71C24N-R4
CH2 RS-422/485 × × ×

<L series>
: Applicable ×: Not applicable

Multi-drop connection
Model Interface 1:1 system configuration
1st module nth module
CH1 RS-232   ×
LJ71C24
CH2 RS-422/485 × × 
CH1 RS-232  × ×
LJ71C24-R2
CH2 RS-232  × ×
*2 : Connectable only with an RS-232 adapter (L6ADP-R2).
*3 : Connectable only with an RS-232 ⇔ RS-422 conversion board/adapter.

2 - 16
 2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules

■ Modules connectable from MELSECNET/H board 1

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the MELSECNET/H board.

OVERVIEW
Programmable
I/F board model Module model
controller series
Q80BD-J71LP21-25
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11, QJ71LP21-25,
Q80BD-J71LP21G Q series
Q80BD-J71BR11
QJ71LP21S-25 2

CONFIGURATION
■ Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Controller Network board

SYSTEM
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Controller Network
board.

I/F board model

Programmable
Module model
3
controller series

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Q80BD-J71GP21-SX
Q series QJ71GP21-SX, QJ71GP21S-SX
Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX

SCREEN
■ Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Field Network board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Field Network 4
board.

MANAGEMENT
Programmable
I/F board model Module model
controller series

PROJECT
Q series QJ71GF11-T2
Q81BD-J71GF11-T2
L series LJ72GF15-T2, LJ71GF11-T2

5
■ Modules connectable from CC-Link Ver.1 board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.1 board.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Programmable
I/F board model Module model
controller series
A80BD-J61BT11
A80BD-J61BT13
Q series QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N 6

■ Modules connectable from the CC-Link Ver.2 board

PARAMETERS
SETTING

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.2 board.

Programmable
I/F board model Module model
controller series 7
Q series QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
Q80BD-J61BT11N
SETTING DEVICE

L series L26-BT, LJ61BT11

MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2 - 17
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

■ Modules connectable from Ethernet board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the Ethernet board.

Programmable
I/F board model Module model
controller series
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5,
Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06UDEH,
Q series
Q06UDV, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDEH,
Ethernet board built-in a personal
Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH
computer or commercially available
L series LJ71E71, L02, L02-P, L06, L26, L26-BT, L26-PBT
FX series FX-ENET series

2 - 18
 2.4 System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal Computer

1
2.4 System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal Computer

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

This section explains the system configuration when accessing from the personal computer with the
memory card on the personal computer.
2
● Installing memory card into PC card slot

CONFIGURATION
When installing a Q series memory card into the PC card slot, the following adapter is required.

Product name Model manufacturer

SYSTEM
PC card adapter Q2MEM-ADP Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

● Writing/reading data to/from memory card

Using the following functions, even if a memory card cannot be installed into the programmable
3

CONFIGURATION AND
controller CPU, data can be written or read by installing the memory card to personal computer.

BASIC OPERATIONS
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Function PLC series Memory card Windows®2000 Windows®XP Windows Vista® Reference

SCREEN
SRAM card*2 × × ×
Q series*1 ATA card   
IC memory card
data write/read Flash card × × × Section 12.11.1 4
Q series*3 SD memory
  
L series*4 card

MANAGEMENT
IC memory card

PROJECT
data write/read SD memory
L series*4    Section 12.11.2
(edit and data card
copy)
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, and High-speed Universal model QCPU.
*2 : When using a SRAM card, set the driver to CONFIG.NT. 5
(For details, refer to HELP of Windows®)
When using an ATA card, Windows® recognizes it automatically.
If the ATA card cannot be recognized, select [Control Panel] ⇒ [System] to set the personal computer.

PROGRAMS
If the driver for SRAM card is set to CONFIG.NT, cancel the setting.

EDITING
*3 : For High-speed Universal model QCPU only
*4 : Not supported by L02S

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2 - 19
 GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.5 Supported Programming Languages

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

This section explains details of the programming languages supported by GX Works2.

: Supported ×: Not supported
Simple project
Programming Structured
Description without
language with labels project
labels
A graphic language using ladder programs composed of contacts and
coils. Ladder diagrams are created in a similar way to existing GX
Ladder
Developer.   *1
Diagram (LD)
In projects with labels, the Inline structured text function can be used to
edit ST programs on the ladder editor.
Structured
A text language with grammatical structure similar to C language. × *1 
Text (ST)
Sequential
A graphic language which defines the executing order or condition of a
Function Chart  *1 *1
*2
program.
(SFC)
Structured A graphic language using ladder programs composed of contacts and
× × 
Ladder coils.
Function
Block A graphic language using ladder programs by connecting functions and/
× × 
Diagram or function blocks with lines.
(FBD)
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
*2 : For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the display format of SFC can be selected from "MELSAP3", "MELSAP-L (Instruction Format)", and
"MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)".

2 - 20
 1

OVERVIEW
3 SCREEN 2
CONFIGURATION AND

CONFIGURATION
BASIC OPERATIONS

SYSTEM
3
This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of GX Works2.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
3.1 Starting and Exiting GX Works2 3-2

MANAGEMENT
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations 3-3

PROJECT
3.3 Selecting Language 3 - 30

3.4 Help Function 3 - 32 5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3-1
 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.1 Starting and Exiting GX Works2

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting GX Works2.

■ Starting GX Works2

Start GX Works2.

Operating procedure
• Select [Start] ⇒ [All Programs] ⇒ [MELSOFT Application] ⇒ [GX Works2] ⇒ [GX
Works2].

■ Exiting GX Works2

Exit GX Works2.

Operating procedure
• Select [Project] ⇒ [Exit].

3-2
 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

1
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains the main frame (basic screen) of GX Works2 that is displayed when it is started
up.
2

CONFIGURATION
3.2.1 Main frame configuration

SYSTEM
The following screen shows a main frame configuration on which a work window and docked windows
are displayed.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
Screen display

BASIC OPERATIONS
Title bar

SCREEN
Menu bar

Toolbar
Function Block
4
Selection window
Navigation

MANAGEMENT
window

PROJECT
Work
window
5
Docked window

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

Status bar PARAMETERS

SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.1 Main frame configuration 3-3

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Display contents
Name Description Reference
Title bar Display a project name. –
Menu bar Display menu options for executing each function. –
Toolbar Display tool buttons for executing each function. Section 3.2.2
A main screen used for operations such as
Work window Section 3.2.3
programming, parameter setting, and monitoring
A sub screen to support operations performed on a
Docking window Section 3.2.4
work window
Navigation Display contents of a project in tree format. Section 3.2.5
GX Works2 Version 1
Display a list of functions (such as function blocks) Operating Manual
Selection
used for programming. (Simple Project, Function Block)
(Structured Project)
GX Works2 Version 1
Display compilation and check results (errors and Operating Manual
Output
warnings). (Simple Project)
(Structured Project)
Cross Reference Display cross reference results. Section 10.1
Device List Display the device list. Section 10.2
Display assignments of refresh devices and link
CC-Link Device Reference Section 6.3.5
devices specified for the CC-Link parameter.
A screen used for monitoring and changing current
Watch 1 to 4 Section 14.6
device values.
GX Works2 Version 1
Intelligent Function Module Screens used for monitoring intelligent function
Operating Manual
Monitor 1 to 10 modules.
(Intelligent Function Module)
A screen used for searching and replacing character
Find/Replace Section 10.3
strings in the project.
Section 16.6.2
A screen used for setting the debug which uses the
Debug Section 16.6.3
simulation function.
Section 16.6.4
Status bar Display information about a project being edited. Section 3.2.6

● Focus point indication in Windows Vista® or Windows® 7

When using Windows Vista® or Windows® 7, the focus point may not be indicated on the screen.
To display the focus point, set the following setting.
1) For Windows Vista®, select [Start] ⇒ [Control Panel] ⇒ [Ease of Access] ⇒ [Ease of Access Center].
For Windows® 7, select [Start] ⇒ [Control Panel] ⇒ [Ease of Access Center].
2) Select "Make the keyboard easier to use".
3) Select "Underline keyboard shortcuts and access keys".

3-4 3.2.1 Main frame configuration

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3.2.2 Toolbars 1

A toolbar is a block of on-screen buttons for executing frequently-used functions included in a menu.

OVERVIEW
(Appendix 1)
The toolbars to be displayed and their display positions on the screen can be set by the user.

2
■ Displaying/hiding toolbars

CONFIGURATION
Select a toolbar to be displayed.

SYSTEM
Operating procedure
• Select [View] ⇒ [Toolbar] ⇒ [(toolbar name)].
3
The selected toolbar is displayed on the screen.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.2 Toolbars 3-5

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Docking/floating toolbars

Switch the display format (docked/floating) of a toolbar.

● Floating a toolbar
Display a toolbar floating from the main frame.

Operation
• Drag a docked toolbar to the desired position for floating display.

Drag and drop

3-6 3.2.2 Toolbars

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

● Docking a toolbar 1
Display a toolbar docked to the main frame.

Operation

OVERVIEW
• Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and drop it in the main frame.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Drag and drop
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
● Method for docking a toolbar at the original position
To dock a floating toolbar back at the original position, double-click on the title bar of the toolbar.
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.2 Toolbars 3-7

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Displaying/hiding all toolbars

Display/hide all toolbars that are set to be displayed.

The display setting of toolbar can be saved by performing the following operation.

Operating procedure
• Select [View] ⇒ [Toolbar] ⇒ [Display All].
The standard toolbars and all other toolbars are displayed.*1
The changes of toolbar positions and the display setting of displaying/hiding toolbars are
maintained.
*1 : Inactive toolbars are included. Toolbars of inapplicable functions are grayed out.
<When the [Display All] function is enabled>

When the [Display All] function is disabled while all toolbars are displayed, only the active toolbars
are displayed.
<When the [Display All] function is disabled>

3-8 3.2.2 Toolbars

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

■ Customizing toolbars 1

Set the types of tool buttons to be displayed on each toolbar.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select the Toolbar options button ( ) ⇒ [Add or Remove Buttons].
A list of tool buttons is displayed.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
2. Select the check box in front of the tool button to be displayed on the screen.
The selected tool buttons are displayed on the screen.
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
The toolbar configuration returns to the default when [Reset Toolbar] is selected. 5
Restrictions

PROGRAMS
● Restrictions when customizing toolbars

EDITING
The type of tool buttons for the following toolbars cannot be set.
• Monitor status
• Debug function
• Sampling trace 6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.2 Toolbars 3-9

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Displaying editing screens with the toolbar

For Simple projects only, editing screens can be displayed with the toolbar.

Screen display
Select [View] ⇒ [Toolbar] ⇒ [Docking Window/Switch Project Data].

Data type Data name

Operating procedure
1. Select a data type to be displayed.

2. Select a data name to be displayed.

The editing screen of the selected data name is displayed.

● Display icon ( )
The editing screen of the selected data type and data name can be displayed by clicking .

3 - 10 3.2.2 Toolbars
 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3.2.3 Work windows 1

A work window is a main screen used for operations such as programming, parameter setting, and

OVERVIEW
monitoring in GX Works2.

Screen display
2
Tab Tooltip Scroll button

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Switching button

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
Display contents

PROJECT
Item Description
Become active when selected.
The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping tabs.
The window(s) can be closed from the menu displayed by right-clicking the tab. In the other way, the
5
active window can be closed by clicking on the tab.

PROGRAMS
Tab

EDITING
Right-click

6
Tooltip Display a brief explanation when the cursor is placed on the selected tab.

Scroll button
Scroll the tab display to the left and right. PARAMETERS
Display hidden tabs.
SETTING

Display the list of windows being displayed.

Switching button
Select a data name displayed on the list to display its corresponding window on the top.
Display windows Display screens such as the program editor, label setting editor, and monitoring screen.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.3 Work windows 3 - 11

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Maximizing/minimizing screens

Maximize/minimize the screen size on the work window.

● Maximizing the screen

Operation
• Click the Maximize button ( ).

Click

3 - 12 3.2.3 Work windows

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

● Minimizing the screen 1

Operation

OVERVIEW
• Click the Minimize button ( ).

2
Click

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

● Restoring the screen size

Click to return the maximized/minimized screen to its previous size.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Click

3.2.3 Work windows 3 - 13

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Arranging screens

Arrange screens to display on the work window.

● Cascading screens

Operation
• Select [Window] ⇒ [Cascade].

● Tiling screens vertically

Operation
• Select [Window] ⇒ [Tile Vertically].

3 - 14 3.2.3 Work windows

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

● Tiling screens horizontally 1

Operation

OVERVIEW
• Select [Window] ⇒ [Tile Horizontally].

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
● Arranging icons (minimized windows) at the bottom of the work window

Operation 5
• Select [Window] ⇒ [Arrange Icons].

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.3 Work windows 3 - 15

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Arranging/displaying windows

Display a list of open windows, and also open and arrange specified windows.
This function is useful to display the desired window efficiently when multiple windows are open.

Screen display
Select [Window] ⇒ [Other Windows].

3 - 16 3.2.3 Work windows

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3.2.4 Docking windows 1

This section explains the operations common to dock windows.

OVERVIEW
■ Displaying/Hiding dockable windows
2
Display/hide a dockable window.

CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure

SYSTEM
• Select [View] ⇒ [Docking Window] ⇒ [(target item)].

■ Docking/floating dockable windows 3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Switch the display format of a dockable window.
● Docked display
Display a dockable window docked to the main frame.

SCREEN
● Floating display
Display a dockable window floating from the main frame.
4
Operation

MANAGEMENT
• Drag the title bar of a floating dockable window and drop it to the guidance in the main

PROJECT
frame.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Drag and drop

6
Drag a dockable window to the guidance. A new tab appears after the window is docked.

The docked window is floated by dragging the title bar to the desired position.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.4 Docking windows 3 - 17

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

● Operation of dockable windows

Docked windows can be switched from docked to floating or vice versa by double-clicking the title bar.

Dockable display

Double-click

Double-click

Floating display

● Changing the tab order

The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping the desired tab to the left or right when multiple dockable
windows are docked.

Drag and drop The tab order is changed.

3 - 18 3.2.4 Docking windows

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

■ Window minimized mode 1

Minimize a docked window as a tab.

The window minimized mode can be set and disabled by the following procedure.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
• Click the window minimized mode switching icon ( / ). 2

CONFIGURATION
Window minimized switching icon
Docked window display in
Normal display Window minimized mode window minimized mode

SYSTEM
Only the tab is Placing the cursor
displayed in
window
on the tab displays
the window.
3
minimized

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
mode.

SCREEN
The window is displayed normally
after disabling window minimized
mode. 4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.4 Docking windows 3 - 19

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.2.5 Navigation window

This section explains the Navigation window that displays the contents of a project in tree format.
Operations such as creating new data and displaying editing screens can be performed on the
Navigation window.
(Chapter 4)

Screen display
Select [View] ⇒ [Docking Window] ⇒[Navigation].

Title bar

Toolbar

View
selection
area

Display contents
Name Description Reference
Title bar Display a title of a view being displayed. –
Display tool buttons of functions to be executed on
Toolbar Appendix 1
each view.
View selection area Area for selecting a view to display. –
Project Display the Project view. Section 4.2.1
GX Works2 Version 1
User Library Display the User Library view. Operating Manual
(Structured Project)
Connection Destination Display the Connection Destination view. Section 11.1.1

● Color of characters on title bar when uncompiled data exist

The color of characters on the title bar becomes red when an uncompiled data exists on the Project view or User
Library view.

Project with uncompiled data Project without uncompiled data

3 - 20 3.2.5 Navigation window

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

■ Sorting data 1

Sort data displayed in tree format.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Open a folder on the Navigation window and select the data for sorting.
2
2. Right-click and select [Sort] ⇒ [(sort type)] from the shortcut menu.

CONFIGURATION
The data displayed in tree format are sorted in the ascending order.
When the same operation is performed after sort execution, the sort order is switched between

SYSTEM
ascending and descending.
The following table shows the sort types.

Type Description 3

CONFIGURATION AND
Sort data in the selected folder according to the execution order.

BASIC OPERATIONS
When a program file is selected, tasks in the program file are sorted according to
Execution Order*1 the execution order.
When a task is selected, programs in the task are sorted according to the

SCREEN
execution order.
Name Sort the data in the selected folder according to the name.
Date Sort the data in the selected folder according to the date modified.
4
Language*2 Sort the data in the selected folder according to the programming language type.
POU Type*3 Sort the data in the selected folder according to the POU type.

MANAGEMENT
*1 : SFC programs of Simple project, and program files and tasks of Structured project only

PROJECT
*2 : Tasks, programs, and FB/FUN of Structured project only
*3 : FB/FUN of Structured project only

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.5 Navigation window 3 - 21

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Expanding all uncompiled data

Expand all uncompiled data exist on the Project view and User Library view.

Operating procedure
1. Click on the toolbar.

2. Select [Expand All Uncompiled Data].

All uncompiled data are expanded and become selectable status.

■ Collapsing tree

Collapse tree on the Project view and User Library view.

Operating procedure
1. Click on the toolbar.

2. Select [Collapse All].

The tree is collapsed.

3 - 22 3.2.5 Navigation window

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3.2.6 Status bar 1

The status bar displays information about the current project at the bottom of the screen.

OVERVIEW
Connection Project Project Programmable Connection Insert/ Caps Num
Security information Cursor position
time language type controller type destination Overwrite Lock Lock
2
The following shows the information to be displayed.

CONFIGURATION
Item Description
Connection time Display the connection duration of the phone line.

SYSTEM
Project language Display the language set for the language selection.
Display the project type.

Project type
• Unlabeled : Simple project (without labels) 3
• Simple : Simple project (with labels)

CONFIGURATION AND
• Structured : Structured project

BASIC OPERATIONS
Security information Display the login user name when security is set for the project.
Programmable controller type Display the programmable controller type of the project.

SCREEN
Display the set content of the Transfer Setup screen.
For Redundant CPU, the set content is displayed as shown below.
Connection destination
4
Cursor position Display the cursor position in the editing screen.

MANAGEMENT
Insert/Overwrite Display the current mode (insert or overwrite).
Caps Lock Display the effective status of the Caps Lock.

PROJECT
Num Lock Display the effective status of the Num Lock.

■ Displaying/hiding status bar 5

Display/hide the status bar.

PROGRAMS
Operating procedure

EDITING
• Select [View] ⇒ [Statusbar].
A check mark is appended in front of the menu option and the status bar is displayed on the 6
screen.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.6 Status bar 3 - 23

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts

Change the color and font settings on program editors and label editors.

Screen display
Select [View] ⇒ [Color and Font].

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Target Select the change target work window.
Font Setting Change font settings.
Auto (Based on system settings) Select this to use the font settings in Windows®.
Select this to customize the font settings.
User settings
Click the button to select the desired font.
Color Setting –
Color Setting Items Select the change target item and color.

2. Click the button.

3 - 24 3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Screen button
1
●
Displays the Font screen.

OVERVIEW
The font type, style, and size can be customized.
Some font styles and sizes, however, cannot be set depending on target work windows.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
●
Displays the Color screen. 4
The color can be customized. The created color is added as "Custom" in the color selection field of
the Color and Font screen. Only one color can be added as "Custom".

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6
●
Displays the Import Color and Font setting file screen. PARAMETERS
SETTING

Select "Color and Font setting file (*.gcs)" and click the button to read the file.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts 3 - 25

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

●
Displays the Export Color and Font setting file screen.
Set a save destination and a file name for the color and font setting file (*.gcs).
The content displayed on the Color and Font screen is saved on the file by clicking the
button.

●
Resets the color and font settings to default.
●
Applies the changed color and font settings.

● Font setting
Some fonts may be displayed as garbled characters.
Change the setting to another font if this happens.

3 - 26 3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys 1

Customize a shortcut key of each function.

OVERVIEW
Customized shortcut keys can be registered as a template and utilized.

Screen display
2
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Key Customize].

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5
■ Setting shortcut keys

PROGRAMS
This function creates/changes/deletes a shortcut key.

EDITING
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen. 6
Item Description
Shortcut Key – PARAMETERS
SETTING

Category Select a category from the group list categorized by window.

Command Select a function name whose shortcut key to be changed.
Current Key Display the shortcut key assigned to the selected command.
Specify a new shortcut key to be assigned. Input it by pressing a key(s) on
7
Press the keys to assign the keyboard.
SETTING DEVICE

Example) +
Display the menu name to which the entered shortcut key is assigned.
MEMORY

Current When the key is already assigned to another function, the function name is
displayed.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys 3 - 27

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

2. Click the button.

The shortcut key is assigned.
The assigned shortcut key is displayed in "Current Key".

3. Click the button.

The shortcut key is created/changed.

Screen button
●
Deletes the shortcut key selected in "Current Key".
●
Displays the Enter Template Name screen.
Register the assigned shortcut keys as a template with a desired name.
The registered template is displayed in "Template".

● Assigning shortcut keys

Up to three shortcut keys can be assigned to one function. The shortcut key displayed on the top in "Current Key" is
displayed on the menu.
● Templates
The maximum file name length for a template is 24 characters.

3 - 28 3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys

 3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

■ Registering templates 1

This function registers/deletes a template of shortcut keys.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Set the item on the screen.
2
Item Description

CONFIGURATION
Select a template of shortcut keys from .
• Default Setting
Change to the default setting.

SYSTEM
• GPPA Format Setting
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming to the
Template same setting of GPPA.
• GPPW format setting 3
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming and

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SFC programming to the same setting of GX Developer.
• Setting of MEDOC Format
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming to the
same setting of MELSEC MEDOC.

SCREEN
2. Click the button.
4
The selected template of shortcut keys is applied.

MANAGEMENT
Screen button

PROJECT
●
Deletes a template selected in "Template".
● 5
Imports a pre-saved template file (*.gks) and adds it to "Template".
●

PROGRAMS
Saves a template selected in "Template" as a template file (*.gks).

EDITING
Restrictions
● Templates with "MEDOC Format Setting" 6
Any of the following symptoms occurs when the template with "MEDOC Format Setting" is imported to GX Works2
Version 1.95Z or earlier.

PARAMETERS
• Shortcut keys of the tool buttons on the "Ladder" toolbar are hidden.
• When the numeric key is pressed on the Find screen displayed by the simple search function, the display on the
SETTING

element selection field is changed.

• An operation according to the set shortcut keys is performed when a number is entered on the ladder editor, the
Enter VLine screen, the Enter HLine screen, the Delete VLine screen, or the Delete HLine screen.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys 3 - 29

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.3 Selecting Language

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains how to select a language used for project data (such as device comments,
statements, and notes).
By selecting a language of the project, data can be created in a language other than English.
Data created in another language can be displayed without character corruption.
For restrictions when selecting a project language, refer to Appendix 18.

Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Language Selection].

< Before creating a new project > < When editing a project >

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Project Language Select the language of the project.
Save the project (Overwrite save) Select this to save the project before changing the project language.

2. Click the button.

The project data are displayed in the selected project language.

3 - 30
 3.3 Selecting Language

1
● Considerations when project language change is canceled
If characters other than alphanumeric characters are used for data names and label names, the project language

OVERVIEW
change may be canceled. In such case, change data names or label names according to the error message displayed
on the Output window. In some cases, even after the project language is changed, characters other than the characters
of the selected language may be used. Change the characters other than those of the selected language.
For data names which causes the cancellation of project language change when characters other than alphanumeric
characters are used, refer to Appendix 17.1. 2
● Considerations when changing project language

CONFIGURATION
The project language change function does not change the characters on setting menus and screens.
To display characters on setting menus and screens in another language, use the specific version of GX Works2 that
supports the language.

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3 - 31
 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.4 Help Function

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains the help function of GX Works2.

3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help

Use the GX Works2 help function to learn GX Works2 operations, understand functions, and check
error codes of programmable controller CPU.
The following items can be checked with the GX Works2 help function.
• Help for operations
• Help for instructions
• Help for special relays/special registers
• Help for CPU errors
• Error codes for CPU module communication
• Changes from GX Developer
• List of shortcut keys
• FX manuals*1
*1 : For FXCPU, GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU) and Adobe® Reader® version 8 or later are required to view the help. For
installing GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU), refer to the following section.
■ Installing GX Works2 help for FXCPU

Screen display
Select [Help] ⇒ [GX Works2 Help] ( ).
Tab

3 - 32 3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help

 3.4 Help Function

1
● Displaying GX Works2 help
Enter a keyword in the keyword entry field on the standard toolbar of GX Works2, and press the  key to display

OVERVIEW
the help items searched by the keyword.

CONFIGURATION
Keyword entry field

The help items can also be displayed by the screen title by pressing the  key with the selected screen such as
Navigation window, program editor, and Function Block Selection window of GX Works2. (Some screens do not

SYSTEM
support the  key function.)
For FXCPU, when a special relay (M) or a special register (D) is searched, the head of the section which describes the
special relay (M) or the special register (D) in the programming manual (PDF file) is displayed.
● Instruction help 3
• Instructions which are supported by the instruction help function are: common instructions and application functions

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, and sequence instructions and application functions for FXCPU.
• The SFC editor is not supported by the instruction help function.
• Operators and ST control syntax are not supported by the instruction help function.

SCREEN
• When the selected instruction is corresponded by multiple items, the Result screen (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) or
the Help Reference screen (for FXCPU) is displayed. Double-click the item to display the help.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
• When the selected instruction contains a special relay or special register, the Help References screen is displayed.
5
Select a keyword displayed and click the button.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

● Error codes when communicating with CPU module

When an error whose error code is in the range between 4000H and 4C09H occurs while communicating with the CPU
module, the following pop-up screen is displayed on the right-bottom corner of the screen.
The pop-up help function is not supported by FXCPU.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help 3 - 33

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

● Operation of the help function for FXCPU

• The "Add to Favorites" function on the Navigation window of GX Works2 help, and the "Keyword", "Search",
"Favorites", and "History" functions under [View] ⇒ [Navigation] are not supported by the help function for FXCPU.
For the search function, display the programming manual (PDF) and use the search function of Adobe® Reader®.
• If another PDF reader other than Adobe® Reader® is installed, the content of the help function may not be displayed.
In this case, reinstall Adobe® Reader®.
• When an Adobe® Reader® error occurs while using the help function, the error may be solved by restarting a
personal computer.

■ Installing GX Works2 help for FXCPU

Double-click "setup.exe" in the "DocFX" folder on the CD-ROM (Disc 2) to install GX Works2 Help (for
FXCPU).

3 - 34 3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help

 3.4 Help Function

■ Setting options for GX Works2 help function 1

Set options for "Startup", "Window", and "Tab" items of the GX Works2 help function.

OVERVIEW
Screen display
Select the GX Works2 help menu [Operation] ⇒ [Options].
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
Operating procedure
4
• Set the items on the screen.

MANAGEMENT
Item Description
Startup –

PROJECT
Restore the previous status at the start Select this to activate the GX Works2 help function with the state of
of Help previous operation.
Window –
Select this to set the GX Works2 help function in the task tray when the
5
GX Works2 help window is minimized.
Add help icon to the System Tray
When this item is selected and the GX Works2 help window is
when window is minimized
minimized, the GX Works2 help function can be activated from the task

PROGRAMS
tray.

EDITING
Select this to set a maximum number of windows to be displayed with
Set maximum number of window the GX Works2 help function.
Enter a maximum number of windows.
Tab – 6
Switch tab by rolling mouse wheel on Select this to switch tabs with the mouse wheel when the cursor is on
tab the tab.*1
Select this to specify the tab size. PARAMETERS
Specify tab size
SETTING

Enter a width and a height of the tab.

*1 : When the tab of FX manual is displayed in front, the tabs cannot be switched with the mouse wheel. Select a tab
other than that of FX manual to switch tabs.

7
SETTING DEVICE

3.4.2 Displaying operating manuals

MEMORY

Display the operating manuals of GX Works2 Version 1.

8
Screen display
SETTING DEVICE

Select [Help] ⇒ [Operating Manual] ⇒ [(manual name)].

INITIAL VALUES

3.4.2 Displaying operating manuals 3 - 35

 GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.4.3 Checking version of GX Works2

Display information such as the software version of GX Works2.

Operating procedure
• Select [Help] ⇒ [About].

3 - 36 3.4.3 Checking version of GX Works2

 1

OVERVIEW
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 2

CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains basic operations and management of projects.

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management 4-2

MANAGEMENT
4.2 Project Operations 4-9

PROJECT
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data 4 - 33

4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data 4 - 43 5

4.5 Changing Project Types 4 - 44

PROGRAMS
4.6 Managing Project Revisions 4 - 45

EDITING
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats 4 - 51
6
4.8 Saving projects in other formats 4 - 57

4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2 4 - 58

PARAMETERS
SETTING

4.10 Setting Security for Projects 4 - 59

4.11 Setting Security Key 4 - 69

7
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects 4 - 77
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4-1
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.1 GX Works2 Project Management

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains the management of GX Works2 projects.

In GX Works2, created projects are saved in the workspace format or the single file format.

4.1.1 Workspace format

A workspace manages multiple projects at once.

When configuring a system containing multiple programmable controller CPUs, a project needs to be
created for each programmable controller CPU. However, projects in the same system can be
managed by saving projects created in a single workspace in the workspace format.
When using MELSOFT Navigator, save projects in the workspace format.
< System configuration example >

First stage construction for company A

< ABC alarm processing >

Ethernet

< XYZ control >

MELSECNET/10(H)

< Conveyor control > < Additional processing >

Batch-manage projects in the workspace format

< GX Works2 project management >

First stage construction for company A Workspace

ABC alarm processing
XYZ control
Conveyor control Project
Additional processing

4-2 4.1.1 Workspace format

 4.1 GX Works2 Project Management

■ Configuration of workspace and project 1

The following explains the configuration of GX Works2 workspace and project.

OVERVIEW
<Data in the GX Works2 data folder>

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
<Data in the Workspace 1 folder>

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
Save destination folder A folder specified for the save folder path when the project is saved.
Workspace name folder A folder corresponds to the workspace name specified when the project is saved. 4
Project name folder A folder corresponds to the project name specified when the project is saved.
workspacelist.xml A file created automatically when the project is saved.

MANAGEMENT
projectlist.xml A file created automatically when the project is saved.

PROJECT
Do not change or delete workspace configuration or project using an application such as Windows®
Explorer.
If a data name is changed or deleted using an application such as Windows? Explorer and projects 5
without containing actual data may remain in a project list of the function such as opening a project.
Those faulty projects can be deleted from the project list by selecting [Project] ⇒ [Delete].

PROGRAMS
For copying GX Works2 project on Windows® Explorer, select either following operation to copy the

EDITING
project without breaking the configuration of workspace and project.
• Copy the entire save destination folder ( above).
• Copy the workspace name folder and "workspacelist.xml". 6

When "workspacelist.xml" ( above) or "projectlist.xml" ( above) does not exist in the folder by
performing the copy operation other than above, the copied workspaces/projects are not displayed in PARAMETERS
SETTING

"Workspace/Project List" on the Open screen.

However, note that the project can be opened forcibly by selecting "All Folders" for "Display" on the
Open screen and displaying all folders.
When a file other than "workspacelist.xml" or "projectlist.xml" is missing, the project may not be 7
opened.
SETTING DEVICE

Restrictions
MEMORY

● Opening a project forcibly by selecting "All Folders"

The following operations cannot be performed.
• Register, Restore, and Verify functions of project revision history 8
• Security user management
SETTING DEVICE

• Automatic project save

INITIAL VALUES

However, the above restrictions are invalidated by selecting [Project] ⇒ [Save As], and saving the project.

4.1.1 Workspace format 4-3

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.1.2 Single file format

The single file format is a format to handle project files as a single file.
Projects are managed without being aware of the folder configuration and the file configuration by
saving projects in the single file format. Operations such as changing project names, copying and
pasting projects, and sending and receiving data, can easily be performed on Explorer.
<Single file format project (*.gxw)>

● When using MELSOFT Navigator

Projects saved in the single file format cannot be used in MELSOFT Navigator.
Save projects in the workspace format.

4-4 4.1.2 Single file format

 4.1 GX Works2 Project Management

4.1.3 Project 1

Project contents displayed on the Project view in tree format are as shown below.

OVERVIEW
Contents displayed on the view differs according to the types of programmable controller and project.
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the reference destinations, refer to the following
manuals respectively:
2
(Simple) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)

CONFIGURATION
(Structured) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

SYSTEM
The following are examples for QCPU (Q mode).
<Simple project (without labels)>
Set various parameters. *4 3
*1 Make settings for the intelligent function modules. (Intelligent)

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
*5
Set global device comments.
*2

SCREEN
*6
Set an execution type of each program.
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Create programs.*3 (Simple)

*5
Set local device comments.
*7
*1
Make settings for device memory.
Set device initial values. *8 5
*1 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.
*2 : For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
*3 : For FXCPU, a single execution program can be created in either Ladder Diagram or Sequential Function Chart.
*4 : Chapter 6
*5 : Chapter 9
*6 : Section 6.1.1 6
*7 : Chapter 7
*8 : Chapter 8
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.1.3 Project 4-5

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

<Simple project (with labels)>

*5
Set various parameters.
*1 Make settings for the intelligent function modules. (Intelligent)
*6
Set global device comments.
Set global labels. (Simple)
*2 *3

*7
Set an execution type of each program.

Create programs.*4 (Simple)

*6
Set local device comments.
*8
Make settings for device memory.
*1 *9
Set device initial values.

*1 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.

*2 : For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.
*3 : For FXCPU, Simple project (with labels), the 'Execution Program' can be divided into multiple programs.
*4 : For FXCPU, the program is created in Ladder Diagram only.
*5 : Chapter 6
*6 : Chapter 9
*7 : Section 6.1.1
*8 : Chapter 7
*9 : Chapter 8

4-6 4.1.3 Project

 4.1 GX Works2 Project Management

<Structured project> 1
*3
Set various parameters.
*1 Make settings for the intelligent function modules. (Intelligent)
*4

OVERVIEW
Set global device comments.
Set global labels. (Structured)
*2

*5
2
Set an execution type of each program.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Create programs. (Structured)
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
*4

SCREEN
Set local device comments.
*6
Make settings for device memory.
*1 Set device initial values. *7

*1 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.

4
*2 : For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.

MANAGEMENT
*3 : Chapter 6
*4 : Chapter 9

PROJECT
*5 : Section 6.1.1
*6 : Chapter 7
*7 : Chapter 8
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.1.3 Project 4-7

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Program Setting
On the Project view, an execution type of a program can be set by right-clicking the name of the program whose
execution type is to be changed and selecting [Register Program] ⇒ [Initial]/[Scan]/[Standby]/[Fixed Scan]/[Low Speed]
from the shortcut menu, or dragging and dropping it. The execution type set on the Project view is applied to the
program setting of the PLC parameter.
(Program setting in PLC parameter Section 6.1.1)
Example) Set the execution type of MAIN to 'Scan Program' with the drag-and-drop operation.

<Project view> <Setting screen for PLC parameter>

Drag & drop

The setting made in the Project view is applied.

4-8 4.1.3 Project

 4.2 Project Operations

1
4.2 Project Operations
This section explains basic operations of GX Works2 such as creating, opening, and saving projects.

OVERVIEW
4.2.1 Creating projects 2

CONFIGURATION
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

Configure the settings to create a new project.

SYSTEM
Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [New] ( ).
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Operating procedure
5
• Set the items on the screen.
Item Description

PROGRAMS
Select the type of the project to be created.

EDITING
Project Type
Select "Simple Project" or "Structured Project".
Use Label Select this to create a project using labels when "Simple Project" is selected.
PLC Series Select the programmable controller series for the project.
Select the programmable controller type (programmable controller CPU model) used for the
6
project.
PLC Type When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is supported
by GX Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new project. For a procedure PARAMETERS
to use unsupported programmable controller type, refer to Appendix 14.
SETTING

Language Select the language for the program data to be created when creating a new project.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.1 Creating projects 4-9

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Considerations when using Windows Vista® or Windows® 7

A new GX Works2 project may not be able to be created when using Windows Vista® or Windows® 7.
Set the access authority for a login user to the following folders to which the access authority has not been set.
• The folder to which GX Works2 is installed.
Example) C:\Program Files\MELSOFT
• C:\Documents and Settings\(login user name)\Local Settings\Application Data\MITSUBISHI\SWnDNGPPW2
• The TEMP folder set by environment variable.
Example) C:\Documents and Settings\(login user name)\Local Settings\Temp

If the access authority cannot be changed, right-click the GX Works2 program and select [Run as administrator]. To
activate the program from the shortcut menu, open the property of the shortcut menu and select "Run this program as
an administrator" under "Privilege Level" on the <<Compatibility>> tab.
● Changing data such as workspace name after creating a new project
Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application such
as Windows® Explorer.
For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1.
● Common pointer number setting for projects with labels
When a project with labels is created, the last half of the device range of pointer (P) is set for "Common Pointer No." on
the <<PLC System>> tab of the PLC parameter. This range is set as a pointer range for the "Device/Label Automatic-
Assign Setting" function.
For details of the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
● Connection destination
When creating a new project, the connection destination is set to the route set for "Current Connection" in the
previously-edited project. Review the connection destination setting to change the previously-edited project and the
connection destination.
When creating a new project after installing GX Works2 for the first time, the setting is set to access the programmable
controller CPU directly.
● Creating a new SFC project with FXCPU
When 'SFC' is selected in "Language" with FXCPU, the Block Information Setting screen is displayed.
When an SFC project is created with FXCPU, a ladder program needs to be created using ladder blocks to start up an
initial step of the SFC program. Select "Ladder Block" in "Block Type", and create a startup ladder program using ladder
blocks.

4 - 10 4.2.1 Creating projects

 4.2 Project Operations

■ Creating new projects with data read from programmable controller CPU or 1
intelligent function module (New project creation with data read from
programmable controller CPU)

OVERVIEW
A new project can be created with data read from a programmable controller CPU or an intelligent
function module when the Read from PLC function is executed without creating a new project.
When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is supported by GX
Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new project. For a procedure to use
2
unsupported programmable controller types, refer to Appendix 14.

CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure

SYSTEM
1. Start GX Works2 and select [Online] ⇒ [Read from PLC].
The PLC Series Selection screen is displayed.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
2. Set the item on the screen. 4
Item Description

MANAGEMENT
PLC Series Select the programmable controller series from which data are read.

PROJECT
3. Click the button.
The Transfer Setup screen is displayed.
5
4. Set a communication route to access to the programmable controller CPU.
For the method for setting a connection destination, refer to Chapter 11.

PROGRAMS
The Online Data Operation screen is displayed when the setting of connection destination is

EDITING
completed.

5. Execute the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen. 6
For the method for executing the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen,
refer to Section 12.1.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

● Considerations when creating a new project with data read from programmable controller CPU
When parameters are not read from the programmable controller CPU with data to create a new project, default 7
parameters are set.
Check the parameter setting.
SETTING DEVICE

● Creating a new project with data read from intelligent function module
For the function to create a new project with data read from programmable controller CPU, when an intelligent function
MEMORY

module is mounted on the same base unit as the connected programmable controller CPU, the project data are created
according to the mounted module configuration. Thus, the data of intelligent function modules whose parameters are
not written to the programmable controller CPU are also created.
● Creating a new project with data read from Redundant CPU
Data cannot be read from a Redundant CPU by specifying a system, such as "Control System", "Standby System",
8
"System A", or "System B" for "Target System" of redundant operation.
SETTING DEVICE

When reading data from the Redundant CPU by specifying the system, read data after creating a project.
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.1 Creating projects 4 - 11

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.2.2 Opening existing projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

Read a project saved on a hard disk of personal computer.

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Open] ( ).
< Opening a project in the workspace format > < Opening a project in the single file format >

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.
Workspace Location The folder can be selected on the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Select the workspace or project.
Workspace/Project List
The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".
Select this to display folders for GX Works2 projects only, folders for GX
Developer projects only, or all folders.
Display
By selecting "All Folders" also displays workspace folders and project folders
copied/moved by the application such as Windows® Explorer.
Workspace Name Display the selected workspace name.
Project Name Display the selected project name.
Title Display the title of the selected project.

2. Click the button.

The specified project is displayed.
When the GX Developer project is specified, GX Developer starts automatically and the project is
displayed.

4 - 12 4.2.2 Opening existing projects

 4.2 Project Operations

Screen button
1
●
Displays the Browse For Folder screen.

OVERVIEW
●
Switches to the Open screen in the single file format.
● 2
Switches to the Open screen in the workspace format.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
● Changing data such as workspace name
Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application such
as Windows® Explorer.
For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1. 3

CONFIGURATION AND
● Opening Structured projects

BASIC OPERATIONS
When a Structured project is opened in later version of GX Works2
than the one used for saving the project, the Library Update
Confirmation screen may be displayed.

SCREEN
To modify the project and update the new instructions and/or
application functions, select the corresponding check box(es).

All programs need to be compiled when instructions or application 4

functions are updated.
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels.
Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the

MANAGEMENT
device-assigned labels.

PROJECT
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the
programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including
latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable 5
controller CPU to RUN.
• For FXCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function,

PROGRAMS
and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.

EDITING
(Section 17.4)
For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
● Opening projects being edited by other users 6
The project being edited can be opened by other users as a read-only project. Note that the following functions cannot
be used.

PARAMETERS
• Saving projects
• Project revision history
SETTING

• Succeeding project revision when saving projects with a specific name

• Change PLC type function
• Security function
● Opening projects created in other languages
7
Characters in a project created in other languages may get garbled when it is opened.
SETTING DEVICE

● Open screen
• The Open screen with the initial setting opens a project in the single file format.
MEMORY

Switch the screen by clicking the button to open the existing project in the workspace
format.
• A programmable controller type and a title are not displayed on the Open screen in the single file format.
• If the file save destination path is long, the "Look in" field may be left blank when opening a project in the single file 8
format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be opened normally.
SETTING DEVICE

● Projects saved on the network drive or the removal storage device

INITIAL VALUES

Do not open the project directly. Open it after saving it to the hard disk of the personal computer.

4.2.2 Opening existing projects 4 - 13

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.2.3 Saving projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

Save a project on a personal computer or another data storage device.

■ Saving projects under the specified name

Save the open project under the specified name.

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Save As].
< Saving a project in the workspace format > < Saving a project in the single file format >

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.
Save Location The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Select the workspace or project.
Workspace/Project List
The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".
Workspace Name Enter the workspace name.
Project Name Enter the project name.
Title Enter the title of the project.
Select this to succeed and save the project revision information.
Include revisions*1
(Section 4.6)
Select this to succeed and save the security information of the project.
Include security*1
(Section 4.10)
*1 : This setting can be set only when saving the already existing project with another name.

2. Click the button.

The project is saved in the specified folder under the specified workspace name, project name, and
title.

4 - 14 4.2.3 Saving projects

 4.2 Project Operations

Screen button
1
●
Displays the Browse For Folder screen.

OVERVIEW
●
Switches to the Save As screen in the single file format.
● 2
Switches to the Save As screen in the workspace format.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
● When saved workspace exists
When the saved workspace or project exists, a folder to which the workspace is saved can be specified from
"Workspace/Project List".
● Number of characters used for workspace name, project name, and title
3
The total number of characters used for the path name of the folder to which the project is saved, workspace name, and

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
project name should not exceed 200 characters.
A title can be entered within 128 characters.
● Saving a project contains Structured Ladder programs

SCREEN
If multiple Structured Ladder editors are opened, the project may not be able to be saved.
In this case, start another GX Works2 and save the project by copying all data to the newly-created project.
(Section 4.3.2 "Copying/pasting data in projects")
● Save As screen 4
• The Save As screen with the initial setting saves a project in the single file format.
Switch the screen by clicking the button to save the project in the workspace format.

MANAGEMENT
• If the file save destination path is long, the "Save in" field may be left blank when saving a project in the single file

PROJECT
format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be saved normally.

■ Saving projects 5
Overwrite and save the project being edited.

PROGRAMS
Operating procedure

EDITING
• Select [Project] ⇒ [Save] ( )
The data to be saved is overwritten on the existing project data. 6

PARAMETERS
● Registering project revision when overwriting
SETTING

By setting the option, the Revision Entry screen for registering the project revision is displayed when overwriting the
project.
To display the Revision Entry screen when overwriting the project, select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Project" and then
select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change History". In addition, the revision title can be 7
automatically set when overwriting by selecting "Automatically set revision titles".
(For details of project revision history Section 4.6)
SETTING DEVICE

● Compilation status is not saved by overwriting data

Performing compilation only and overwriting the project, and then opening the project again may cause the project to be
MEMORY

in an uncompiled status.
In this case, overwrite the uncompiled project without performing compilation to save the compilation status normally.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.3 Saving projects 4 - 15

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing

projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

Save projects with compression, and decompress projects saved with compression.
Files can be saved with their sizes reduced by compressing the project. Files can also be saved by
separating them in specific sizes. These functions produce easier project data passing.
These functions are not compatible with commercially available file compression and decompression
tools.

■ Saving projects with compression

Save a desired project with compression.

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Compress/Unpack] ⇒ [Compress].

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Choose a Workspace to Compress
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.
Workspace Location The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Workspace/Project List Select the workspace and project.
Workspace Name Display the selected workspace name.
Project Name Display the selected project name.
Choose a Destination Folder
Enter the folder where the compressed file is saved, and the compressed file
name.
Compressed File Name The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen
by clicking the button.
Select this to succeed and save the project revision information.
Include revisions
(Section 4.6)
Split into volumes of the Select this to save data in multiple compressed files. Specify the split size in the
following size range from 1 to 999MB.

4 - 16 4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects

 4.2 Project Operations

2. Click the button.

1
The compressed project file (*.gwz) is saved in the specified folder.

OVERVIEW
■ Decompressing projects saved with compression

Decompress a project saved with compression.

2
Screen display

CONFIGURATION
Select [Project] ⇒ [Compress/Unpack] ⇒ [Unpack].

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Operating procedure
5
1. Set the items on the screen.

PROGRAMS
Item Description

EDITING
Choose a File to Unpack
Enter the folder (drive/path) in which the compressed file to be decompressed is saved,

Compressed File Name

and the compressed file name.
The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by
6
clicking the button.

PARAMETERS
Choose a Destination Folder SETTING

Enter the folder (drive/path) to which the project to be decompressed is saved.

Workspace Location The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Workspace/Project List Select the workspace and project. 7
Workspace Name Enter the name of the workspace to which the decompressed project is saved.
SETTING DEVICE

Project Name Enter the name of the project to which the decompressed project is saved.
MEMORY

2. Click the button.

The compressed project file is decompressed and saved in the specified folder.
8
Screen button
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

●
Decompresses a compressed project file and opens the project.

4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects 4 - 17

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Decompressing compressed files

A compressed file can also be decompressed on the Unpack screen which is displayed by double-clicking the
compressed file (*.gwz) on Windows® Explorer.
● Names of divided compressed files
When a project is saved in divided compressed files, a number is automatically added after the extension in each name
of the second or later compressed files as shown below.

Name of the first file

Name of the second file
Name of the third file
Name of the fourth file

● Decompressing divided compressed files

Select the first file (*.gwz) when decompressing a series of divided compressed files. To be decompressed, all of a
series of divided files must be in the same folder.

4.2.5 Deleting projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

Delete a project saved on a personal computer or another data storage device.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Project] ⇒ [Delete].
The Delete Project screen is displayed.

2. Select the project to be deleted.

3. Click the button.

The selected project is deleted.

● Deleting projects
• Once a project is deleted, it cannot be restored again.
• The open project cannot be deleted. Delete the project after closing it.
• Projects that can be deleted using this function are the projects saved in the workspace format only.
Delete projects saved in the single file format using Windows® Explorer.

4 - 18 4.2.5 Deleting projects

 4.2 Project Operations

4.2.6 Closing projects 1

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

OVERVIEW
Close an open project.

Operating procedure 2
• Select [Project] ⇒ [Close].

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
4.2.7 Verifying project data

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Verify data of an open project against data of another project.
Verification can be performed only when the programmable controller type and project type of the two
projects are the same.

SCREEN
This function is used to compare the contents of two projects or to locate program changes made in
projects.
To verify data against data on the programmable controller CPU, use the Verify with PLC function. 4
(Section 12.2)
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the project verification.

MANAGEMENT
• Programs

PROJECT
• Parameters
• Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*1
• Device comments 5
• Device memory data
• QD75/LD75 positioning module*1

PROGRAMS
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.

EDITING
Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Verify]. 6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.6 Closing projects 4 - 19

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Operating procedure
1. Click the button to set the verify destination project.
Item Description
Workspace Location Display the path to the workspace of the verify destination.
Display the workspace name of the verify destination.
Verify Destination Workspace Name This field will be blank when a project in the single file format is
Project specified for the verify destination project.
Project Name Display the project name of the verify destination.
Title Display the project title of the verify destination.

2. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Display project data of verify source (data being edited).
Verify Source
Selects the data in the project data list.
<<File Selection>>
Verify Display project data of verify destination (saved project data).
Destination Selects the data in the project data list.
Select SFC blocks in the SFC Block list.

<<SFC Block Selection>>*1,*2

Select the parameter verification level.

■ Verifying parameters
<<Parameter>>*2

*1 : Simple projects only

*2 : Not supported by FXCPU.

3. Click the button.

The verification result is displayed on the Verify Result screen.
■ Checking verification result details

Screen button
●
Selects all the data displayed in the project data list.
●
Cancels the selection status of all the data selected in the project data list.
●
Updates the data displayed in the project data list.

4 - 20 4.2.7 Verifying project data

 4.2 Project Operations

1
● Verifying programs
The verification function verifies the data created by the compilation. If the program is edited after the compilation,

OVERVIEW
compile the program again before performing the verification.
● Data names of verification target data
When multiple data are selected for verification, verification is performed between the source and destination data with
the same name. However, device comments are verified only when their data names are same.
When only one source program is verified against one destination program, verification can be performed even with 2
different names.

CONFIGURATION
● Security status of project
Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not
read-protected.

SYSTEM
● Verifying intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Among modules without initial setting such as QD75/LD75 positioning modules, serial communication/modem interface
modules, and AS-i master modules, only modules in which the auto refresh is set are the verification targets.
● Verifying QD75/LD75 positioning modules 3
One module each for verify source and verify destination can be selected.

CONFIGURATION AND
The following data can be selected as verification targets.

BASIC OPERATIONS
• Parameter
• Servo parameter (For QD75M/MH only)

SCREEN
• Positioning data (Except for positioning comments and M code comments)
• Block start data

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.7 Verifying project data 4 - 21

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

■ Verifying parameters

The verification level can be selected when verifying parameters.

The following table shows the verification details for each setting item.

Item Description
User Setting Area Only Verify only the parameter area set by the user.
All Area Verify all the area including the parameter area set by the system.

● Mismatch in the system setting area

When a mismatch is detected in the parameter area set by the system in the verification set to "All
Area", either of the following messages is displayed.
Take corrective action according to the message.

Message Corrective action

A mismatch is detected in other than user setting area.
Write the parameters, having been written to the programmable controller CPU, to
the programmable controller again.
When a mismatch is detected on the block number AFFF, perform the following
The header information of the operation to reset the area which is set by the system.
parameter blocks is inconsistent. • Select Project view ⇒ Parameter ⇒ Network Parameter ⇒ Ethernet/CC IE/
MELSECNET. Click the button on the displayed MELSECNET/CC IE/
Ethernet Module Configuration screen and write the parameters to the
programmable controller CPU.
Versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, or GX IEC Developer used to create the
This parameter block can't analyze. projects differ between the verify source and the verify destination.
The programmable controller CPU operation is not affected.

4 - 22 4.2.7 Verifying project data

 4.2 Project Operations

■ Checking verification result details 1

Details of mismatched data can be checked on the <<Verify Result List>> tab on the Verify Result
screen.

OVERVIEW
Details of program verification result can be checked for ladder programs only.
For FXCPU, when a block password with the validated setting for "Read-protect the execution
program" exists, matches and mismatches of the program file verification are displayed, however, a
jump to the detailed verify result cannot be performed. 2

CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure
1.

SYSTEM
Double-click the row of the data to display the details of the Verify Result screen.
The following are screens of project with labels.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

2. Set the item on the screen.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

Item Description
The following are the operations when searching for the result using the [Next Unmatch]
( )/[Previous Unmatch] ( ) function.
Do not move cursor at [Next
Unmatch]/[Previous Unmatch] • When this item is selected
7
when devices are within the Among the rows with mismatches, the cursor skips the rows whose mismatched
SETTING DEVICE

automatic-assign range for the devices are within the range of devices automatically assigned to labels.
row shows devices This function excludes the rows with devices reassigned to other devices when a
program is compiled.
unmatched*1
MEMORY

• When this item is not selected

The cursor can be placed on all rows with mismatches.
*1 : For projects with labels only
8
3. Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Next Unmatch] ( )/[Previous Unmatch] ( ).
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

The cursor can only be placed on the rows with mismatches.

4.2.7 Verifying project data 4 - 23

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Detail Verify Result tabs

• The tab order can be changed by drugging and dropping <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs.
• The screen returns from the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab to the <<Verify Result List>> tab by selecting [View] ⇒
[Return to Result List] ( ).
• The selected <<Detail Verify Result>> tab can be closed by selecting [View] ⇒ [Close Detail Result] ( )/[Close All
Detail Result] ( ).
● Verifying device memory data
Device memory data are verified with the actual values.
Even when the display formats of data are different on the device memory editor, the verification result on the same
value will be a match.
For FXCPU, the verification result is as follows:
• a result of internal relay (M) verification includes special device M.
• a result of data register (D) verification includes file register and special device D.
● Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor
Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor are verified as a value 0.
Therefore, if 'device memory data to which devices are not set' and 'device memory data to which devices are entered
without setting device values' are verified, the verification result will be a match.
< Device memory data to which devices are not set > < Device memory data without setting device values >

Verify
< Verification result >

● Direct input (DX) and direct output (DY)

When verifying device comments or device memory data, check the verification result with input (X)/output (Y) for direct
input (DX)/direct output (DY).
● Number of verification results displayed
If the number of mismatches exceeds 1,000, up to 1,000 mismatch results are displayed and verification is suspended
after that.
For a ladder program of program (program file) and POU, since the function determines the difference of the number of
lines between the verify source and the verify target in the list format as a mismatch, the verification is canceled in the
middle of the process even before reaching 1,000 mismatches and the rest of the program is determined as a
mismatch. The remaining part needs to be verified again after modifying the mismatched data.
● Copying verification results
Verification results can be copied and pasted to a text file. Select rows of verification result to be copied, and select
[Edit] ⇒ [Copy].
The copied data are pasted on a text file as data separated by tabs.
● Jumping from verification result
When "Enable calling function block and using inline ST" is selected under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Compile" ⇒ "Basic
Setting", function block program items with no difference may be indicated as a mismatch on the Verify Result screen.
In this case, check the mismatch part by any of the following methods.
• Checking labels/devices set to input/output variables of function block
Open the source program from which function blocks are called, and check labels/devices.
• Checking mismatch parts with the program verification result
Select items as shown below to verify programs.

4 - 24 4.2.7 Verifying project data

 4.2 Project Operations

1
● Jumping from verification result of intelligent function module parameter (initial setting/auto refresh)
When different modes are set to the verify destination and the verify source for auto refresh of temperature control

OVERVIEW
module, jumping to verification result is not performed.
For setting the auto refresh of temperature control module, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

2
■ Checking method when verify source data are modified

CONFIGURATION
Updated verify source data are displayed in the verification result.

SYSTEM
Therefore, the verification result of updated verify source data can be checked without executing the
verification function again when mismatched data is modified.
Even when a data name of verify source is changed, the changed data name is displayed in the
verification result. 3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure
1. Modify the verify source data.

SCREEN
2. Open the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab on the Verify
Result screen.
4

3.

MANAGEMENT
Double-click the modified data on the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail
Verify Result>> tab.

PROJECT
The updated data is displayed in the verification result.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.7 Verifying project data 4 - 25

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

■ Writing verification results to CSV files

Output data displayed on the Verify Result screen to a CSV file.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Write to CSV File] ( ).
The Write to CSV File screen is displayed.

2. Enter a file name.

3. Click the button.

The verification results are saved on a personal computer.

● Formatting CSV file

The saved CSV file is displayed as shown below when it is opened by Excel.
<Display of the Verify Result screen>

<CSV file>

4 - 26 4.2.7 Verifying project data

 4.2 Project Operations

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects 1

*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

OVERVIEW
*1 : CC IE Field head module only

Change the programmable controller type of a project being edited.

2
Screen display

CONFIGURATION
Select [Project] ⇒ [Change PLC Type].

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
Operating procedure 4
1. Set the items on the screen.

MANAGEMENT
Item Description

PROJECT
PLC Series Select the programmable controller series after change.
PLC Type Select the programmable controller type after change.

5
2. Click the button.
The following confirmation message is displayed. Click the button to execute the

PROGRAMS
function.

EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects 4 - 27

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Changing programmable controller type of projects which contain intelligent function modules (For QCPU (Q
mode)/LCPU/CC IE Field head module)
Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after the programmable controller series is changed, but certain
intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable to the programmable controller series after change.
For details of the shift of models of intelligent function modules associated with change of programmable controller
series, refer to the following section.
■ Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller series

To change the model of an intelligent function module, select a module name in "Module Name After Change" on the
following screen displayed at changing the programmable controller type.
To delete all intelligent function modules, select "Delete all after changing intelligent function module".

● List of modifications (For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/CC IE Field head module)

After the Change PLC Type function is completed, the following List of Modifications screen is displayed, and the
changes of the program and parameters can be checked.
The items in the following screen can be copied and pasted to the text file using the + and + keys.

4 - 28 4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

 4.2 Project Operations

1
● Restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution
For the restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution for each programmable controller series, refer to

OVERVIEW
Appendix 10.
● Interruption of processing
If the project of change source includes the data which is neither supported nor able to be modified by any editing
operations with the project of the programmable controller type after change, the processing is interrupted. If this
happens, modify the data first to correspond with the programmable controller type after change, and then execute the 2
Change PLC Type function.

CONFIGURATION
● Execution failure of the Change PLC Type function
The Change PLC Type function cannot be executed in the following cases:
• During the execution of the monitoring function such as program monitoring and device/buffer memory batch

SYSTEM
monitoring.
• Security is set for the open project and the user does not belong to the 'Administrators' group.
• During the execution of the simulation function.
● Data before changing the programmable controller type
3
Restoring the data, after executing the Change PLC Type function, to the data before change is not possible. Execute

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
the function after saving the project data. In addition, note that the project is in the unsaved status after the function
execution.

SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects 4 - 29

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

■ Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller

series

Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after changing the programmable controller series,
but a part of intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable to the programmable
controller series after change.
The following table shows modules which can be changed.

Module name
Module type
QCPU (Q mode) LCPU/CC IE Field head module
Q64AD
Q68ADV
L60AD4
Q68ADI
Q64ADH
Analog
Q62DAN
Q64DAN
L60DA4
Q68DAVN
Q68DAIN
Q64TCTTN L60TCTT4
Q64TCTTBWN L60TCTT4BW
Temperature control
Q64TCRTN L60TCRT4
Q64TCRTBWN L60TCRT4BW
QD62 LD62
Counter
QD62D LD62D
QD75P1
QD75P2
QD75P4
QD75P1N LD75P1
QD75P2N LD75P2
QD75P4N LD75P4
QD75/LD75 positioning
QD75D1 LD75D1
QD75D2 LD75D2
QD75D4 LD75D4
QD75D1N
QD75D2N
QD75D4N
Serial communication/ QJ71C24N LJ71C24
Modem interface QJ71C24N-R2 LJ71C24-R2
AnyWireASLINK interface QJ51AW12AL LJ51AW12AL

4 - 30 4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

 4.2 Project Operations

■ Detailed replacement method screen for changing CPU to Universal model 1

QCPU

OVERVIEW
In GX Works2 with the installed QnH -> QnU Conversion Support Tool, the methods for replacing
instructions and parameters can be displayed from the List of Modifications screen when the
programmable controller type is changed from Basic model QCPU or High Performance model QCPU
to Universal model QCPU.
2
Operating procedure

CONFIGURATION
1. Click the button.

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
2. Specify the project before changing the 5
programmable controller type, and click
the button.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

The overview of the replacement method regarding

instructions and parameters which are changed by the
PLC type change function can be checked on the
displayed Detailed replacement method screen. 7
The Web browser is activated by clicking the link to
SETTING DEVICE

check details of settings. Adobe® Reader® is required

to view the detailed information.
MEMORY

3. Click the button to

search the instruction/device to be replaced. 8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects 4 - 31

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4. Replace the instruction/device by following the

instruction on the <<Replacing Procedure>>
tab.

4 - 32 4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

 4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

1
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
This section explains how to operate each data in a project.

OVERVIEW
4.3.1 Adding new data to project 2

CONFIGURATION
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

Add new data to a project.

SYSTEM
The data that can be added differs according to the type of programmable controller or project.

Screen display 3

CONFIGURATION AND
Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [New].

BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Operating procedure
6
1. Set the items on the screen.

PARAMETERS
Item Description
Data Type Select the type of the data to be added.
SETTING

Data Name Enter the name of the data to be created.

Select the programming language for creating programs.
Program Language Selection is allowed only when the data type is any of the following:
• Program (program block), Function*1 or Function block*2.
7
Result Type*1 Set the data type of return value of the function.
SETTING DEVICE

This item can be set when a function or function block is selected.

Inherent Property*1 For details of check box items, refer to the following manual.
MEMORY

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

*1 : For Structured projects only
*2 : For Simple projects (with labels) and Structured projects only
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.3.1 Adding new data to project 4 - 33

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

2. Click the button.

The editing screen for the created data is displayed.

● Number of characters for a data name

The numbers of characters shown in the following table can be used for data names according to the selectable data
type.
However, some operators such as "-" and "*", and some instruction names such as "MOV", cannot be used. For details
of the characters which cannot be use for data names, refer to Appendix 9.

Data type name Number of characters

Program (program file), local device comment, device
8 characters
memory, and device initial value
Other data types 32 characters

● Maximum numbers of data types that can be created

The table below indicates the maximum numbers of data types that can be created.

Data type name Maximum number

Connection destination 128
SFC block in Simple project*1 320 (128 for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U, 25 for FXCPU)
Program in FXCPU Simple project (with labels) 64
Other data (structures, global labels, etc.) 800
*1 : SFC of Simple projects (with labels) is not supported by FXCPU.

● FXCPU
For FXCPU, the data of device initial values cannot be created.

4 - 34 4.3.1 Adding new data to project

 4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects 1

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

OVERVIEW
Utilize data of a project being edited or other projects.

Operating procedure 2
1. Select a data name to be copied on the Project view.

CONFIGURATION
2. Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Copy].

SYSTEM
The selected data name is copied.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
3. Select a folder to paste the data name on the Project view.
4
4. Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Paste].

MANAGEMENT
If the same data name exists in the folder where the data is to

PROJECT
be pasted or when the data name cannot be used for the
project of the folder where the data is to be pasted because of Select a folder
the different project languages, the Data Paste screen is
displayed. 5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
5. Enter a new name in the "Data Name After Paste" field, and click the
6
button.
The data name is pasted.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects 4 - 35

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Copying/pasting data
• Data can be pasted only to the data that is of the same type as copied data. Data between different projects can be
copied/pasted only when their project types or programmable controller types are the same.
• Multiple data can be copied by holding the  or  key and selecting the data.
• Data can be copied/pasted by right-clicking data to be copied/folder to be pasted and selecting [Copy]/[Paste] from
the shortcut menu, or by dragging and dropping the data from the data to be copied to the folder to be pasted.
• The program is in an uncompiled status after data are pasted. Compile the program again.
• For projects with security, only users whose access level is 'Administrators' can copy/paste data.
• Copying and pasting PLC parameter or network parameter only are not possible. If they are copied individually, the
whole parameter files are copied and the files in the folder where the data is to be pasted are overwritten.
• Pasting of global label data is canceled when the maximum number of labels described below is exceeded. Adjust
the number of global labels in the copy destination and the copy source, and retry pasting data.
• Global label (within a project): 20480
• Global label (within a user library): 20480
● Copying/pasting tasks in Structured project
When tasks are pasted, the number of programs that can be set on the Task Setting screen may be exceeded. Compile
the program and delete the unnecessary programs.

4 - 36 4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects

 4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

4.3.3 Changing project data names 1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

OVERVIEW
Change the data name of an open project.

Operating procedure 2
1. Select the data name to be changed on the Project view.

CONFIGURATION
2. Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Rename].

SYSTEM
3. Change the data name.
3
4. Press the  key.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
The selected data name is changed.

SCREEN
4.3.4 Deleting project data
4
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

MANAGEMENT
Delete data in an open project.

PROJECT
Operating procedure
1. Select the data name to be deleted on the Project view. 5
2. Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Delete].

PROGRAMS
The selected data is deleted.

EDITING
● Deleting data 6
• Multiple data can be selected and deleted.
• When data under the POU are deleted, data under the Program Setting are deleted simultaneously.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.3.3 Changing project data names 4 - 37

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.3.5 Merging data

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

Merge ladder programs or device comment data of multiple projects, and add them to a project.
When the programmable controller series of the projects are the same, data can be merged even if
data's programmable controller types or project types are different.
< Image of merging programs >

Remove the END instructions,

and merge ladder programs by
the order of selection.
END instruction MAIN
MAIN 1
MAIN 1
Order of selection END instruction
on the Merge Data MAIN 2 MAIN 2
screen. END instruction
END instruction appended
MAIN 3 MAIN 3

Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Merge Data].

Operating procedure
1. Select the data type to be merged.
Item Description
Data Type Specify the data type to be merged.
Ladder Program Select this to merge ladder programs.
Device Comment Select this to merge device comments.

4 - 38 4.3.5 Merging data

 4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

2. Set the items on the screen.

1
Item Description
Source Data –

OVERVIEW
Source Project Click the button, and specify the source project.
Workspace Location Display the path to the workspace of the source project.

Workspace Name
Display the workspace name of the source project.
This field will be blank when a project in the single file format is specified for the source
2
project.

CONFIGURATION
Project Name Display the project name of the source project.
Title Display the project title of the source project.

SYSTEM
Display programs or device comments of the source project.
Select data to be merged.
Source Data List
Programs which contain function blocks or inline structured text programs are not
displayed. 3
Display data to be merged. Up to 128 data can be displayed.

CONFIGURATION AND
Target Data List

BASIC OPERATIONS
Data are merged in the displayed order.
Data Name after Merging –
Data Name Specify a data name after merging.

SCREEN
3. Click the button.
Data of "Target Data List" are merged and added to the project. 4

Screen button

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
●
Adds data selected in "Source Data List" to "Target Data List".
●
Adds all data displayed in "Source Data List" to "Target Data List".
5
●
Deletes data selected in "Target Data List".

PROGRAMS
EDITING
●
Deletes all data displayed in "Target Data List".
● 6
Displays the Set Range screen.
Set the range of programs selected in "Target Data List".
The range cannot be set when the source project or the target project is a project with labels. PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.3.5 Merging data 4 - 39

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

●
Displays the Options screen.
Select the processing for label/device comment duplication when merging programs or device
comments of projects with labels.
< Program of project with labels > < Device comment >

● Data to be merged
• Data saved on a personal computer are merged. Save the project data being edited in order to merge them.
• If the merged data exceeds the program capacity, the data are merged within the program capacity.
Example) When merging three programs: MAIN1, MAIN2, and SUB3
In the setting of the following screen, the programs are merged from MAIN1. After merging MAIN1 and
MAIN2, if the result of merging SUB3 exceeds the program capacity, only MAIN1 and MAIN2 are
merged.

● Merging program data when the target project is a project without labels
When the target project is a project without labels, data of program with labels are merged as a program of actual
devices. Furthermore, uncompiled programs in a project with labels of source project are not displayed in "Source Data
List".
● Merging data during monitoring
Data cannot be merged during monitoring. Stop monitoring to merge data.
● Merging programs
When the programmable controller types of the source project and the target project are different, instructions and
devices which cannot be used for the programmable controller type of the target project are merged as the way they
are.
Check the merged program for errors with the program check function or the compilation.
For projects with labels, the local label settings are also merged when programs with labels are merged. However,
since the global label settings are not merged, set labels after programs are merged, or copy the global label data from
the source project.

4 - 40 4.3.5 Merging data

 4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties 1

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

OVERVIEW
Display data properties of folders, parameters, and programs. A title and/or comment can be set to
each data.
2
Screen display

CONFIGURATION
● For property of project
Click on the Project view.

SYSTEM
● For property of each data
Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Property] ( ).
<<Detail>> <<Comment>> 3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
5
Item Description
Data Name Display the data name.
Set a title for the data.

PROGRAMS
Title*1, *2
(The number of applicable characters is 128 for a project and 32 for other data.)

EDITING
Last Change*1 Display the date when the data was updated.
Set a comment for the data.
Comment*1 Press the  and  keys for a line feed.
(The number of applicable characters is 5,120.) 6
*1 : For FXCPU Simple project (with labels), "Title", "Last Change", and <<Comment>> tab are not supported by the
property of "MAIN" under Project view ⇒ "Program Setting" ⇒ 'execution program'.
*2 : For titles of programs that are read from/written to a programmable controller CPU along with the program data, PARAMETERS
refer to Point in this section.
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties 4 - 41

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Titles
Set titles are displayed on each view with a corresponding data name.
For SFC project without labels, a device comment of BL device corresponds to the SFC block becomes a title. When
the device comment of the reference target is read-protected by the security setting, the title is not displayed on the
view.

Titles of programs that are read from/written to a programmable controller CPU along with the program data are titles of
data created for each execution type in the program setting. Those titles are displayed on the Online Data Operation
screen when reading/writing data from/to a programmable controller CPU.

● Properties of Structured projects

Properties of the following data can be set for Structured projects in addition to those indicated above.

Data Setting
Task Priority and executing condition of a task
Function/Function block Whether to use EN/ENO, or MC/MCR for EN control
Library Path to a help file

For details, refer to the explanations of each function.

(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project))
● Destinations for saving properties
The 'titles' and 'comments' set to the data properties can be saved as symbolic information.
(Section 12.1.5)
When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, the symbolic information must be written to/read from the
programmable controller CPU in order to restore the settings of the properties.
When data are read without the symbolic information from the programmable controller CPU, the settings of the
properties are not restored.

4 - 42 4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties

 4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data

1
4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

For the method for setting the intelligent function module data, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 - 43
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.5 Changing Project Types

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

This section explains how to change the type of an open project.

Using the method explained below, the type of a Simple project is changed from 'without labels' to
'with labels'. In addition, a Simple project 'with labels' can be changed to a Structured project.
Changing from a Simple project 'with labels' to a Simple project 'without labels' or changing a
Structured project to a Simple project is not supported.

*1

Simple project Simple project Structured project

'without labels' 'with labels'

*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.

Operating procedure
• Select [Project] ⇒ [Change Project Type].

● Changing project types

When a Simple project (with labels) is changed to a Structured project, project data are stored in the following folder.
• SFC: Created under the Program folder.
• Function block: Created under the FB/FUN folder.

<Simple project (with labels)> <Structured project>

Change the type of the project

Created under
the Program folder

Created under
the FB/FUN folder

● Operation after changing project type

When the project type is changed, programs are in the uncompiled status.
Compile all programs again after changing the project type. (Section 5.4)

4 - 44
 4.6 Managing Project Revisions

1
4.6 Managing Project Revisions

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains how to register a backup of the project with added revision information, and
restoring the registered backup data (content of the past project).
2

CONFIGURATION
4.6.1 Registering revision information (creating backup)

SYSTEM
Create a backup of the project at the point of registration, and register it with the revision information.
3
Screen display

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Select [Project] ⇒ [Project Revision] ⇒ [Revision Entry].

SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
Operating procedure

EDITING
• Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
6
Revision No. Display the revision number to be registered.

PARAMETERS
Date Display "--/--/---- --:--:--" (month/date/year hour:minute:second).
User Display the user name when using the project with security.
SETTING

Title Enter a title of the revision.

Comment Enter comments for the revision.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.6.1 Registering revision information (creating backup) 4 - 45

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

● Revision number and the allowable number of revisions that can be registered
A revision number for the registered revision is automatically assigned from 1 to 9999.
The maximum number of revisions that can be registered is 100. If the number of the registered revisions is to be
exceeded 100, delete unnecessary revisions. The deleted revision numbers are unused.
If the revision number is to be exceeded 9999, delete all the revision data, or save the project with a different name
without succeeding the revision information. (Section 4.2.3)
● The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a title
The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a title is 32.
● The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a comment
The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a comment is 256.
A line feed is handled as 2 characters.
● Registration of project revisions when overwriting and saving projects
By setting the option, the Revision Entry screen for the project revision is displayed when overwriting and saving the
project.
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Project", and then select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change History".
In addition, the revision title can be automatically set when overwriting by selecting "Automatically set revision titles".
● Registration of project revisions for projects with security
For the projects with security, the revisions can be registered only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.

4.6.2 Displaying revision list

Display registered revision information in the order of the revision number.

The revision list is used for registering, restoring, deleting, and verifying backups.

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Project Revision] ⇒ [Revision List].

Display contents
Item Description
No. Display the revision numbers.
Date Display the dates of revision registration.
User For the projects with security, display the user names who have registered the revisions.
Title Display the titles of the revisions.

4 - 46 4.6.2 Displaying revision list

 4.6 Managing Project Revisions

Screen button
1
●
Displays the detailed information of the revision which is selected in the list. "Title" and "Comment"

OVERVIEW
can be edited.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
●
Registers the project being edited as a revision. (Section 4.6.1)

SCREEN
●
Restores the backup data. (Section 4.6.3)
●
4
Deletes the revision information. (Section 4.6.4)

MANAGEMENT
●

PROJECT
Verifies the revision with other revisions or the projects being edited. (Section 4.6.5)

5
● Revision List screen
Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
4.6.3 Restoring backup projects
6
Restore the backup revision information.
After restoring the backup, the project is in the status at the time of registering the revision information.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

Operating procedure
1. Select the revision to be restored on the Revision List screen (Section 4.6.2).
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.6.3 Restoring backup projects 4 - 47

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

2. Click the button.

The revision information to be restored is displayed.

3. Confirm the revision information to be restored. Click

the button.
The message as shown on the right is displayed.

4. Click the button.

The backup of the selected revision information is restored.
The revision number and title of the restored project are displayed on the title bar.
Revision number and title
of the restored project.

● The Revision List screen after restoring a project

After project restoration, is displayed on the row of the restored project on the Revision List screen.

● Access level to be able to use the restoring function when using the projects with security
For the projects with security, the revisions can be restored only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.
● Revisions for the project with security
If the project being edited is the project with security, the registered security in the revision is deactivated when the
security is deactivated. When the revision is restored in such situation, since the project is restored without security, all
users can read the project including the revision data.
To protect the revision data after deactivating the security, delete the revision data in advance.
● Considerations for restoring projects
Register the revision of the project being edited before restoring a project.
When the other revision is restored and overwritten without registering the revision of the project being edited, the
project before restoration is overwritten.

4 - 48 4.6.3 Restoring backup projects

 4.6 Managing Project Revisions

4.6.4 Deleting revision information 1

Delete the registered revision information.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select the revision information to be deleted on the Revision List screen 2
(Section 4.6.2).

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
2.

BASIC OPERATIONS
Click the button.
The message on the right is displayed.

SCREEN
4
3. Click the button.
The selected revision information is deleted.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
● Revision number
The deleted revision numbers are unused. 5
● Revisions being restored
The revision of the project which has been restored from the revision cannot be deleted. To delete the revision,
overwrite and save the project after restoring it.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
4.6.5 Verifying revisions
6
Verify the revision information with other revision information or the project being edited.
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the revision verification. PARAMETERS
SETTING

• Programs
• Parameters
• Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*1
7
• Device comments
SETTING DEVICE

• Device memory data

• QD75/LD75 positioning module*1
MEMORY

*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.6.4 Deleting revision information 4 - 49

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Operating procedure
1. Select the revision to be verified on the Revision List screen (Section 4.6.2).
When the verification function is performed selecting only one revision, the selected revision
information is verified with the project being edited.
To verify two revisions, select two revisions with pressing the  key or  key.

2. Click the button.

The message as shown on the right is displayed.
This message is displayed when verifying the selected
revision information with the project being edited.

3. Click the button.

The Revision Verification screen is displayed.

4. Select the data to be verified.

For details of setting items, refer to the project
verification. (Section 4.2.7)

5. Click the button.

The verification result is displayed on the Verify Result screen.
For details of the Verify Result screen, refer to the project verification.
(Section 4.2.7)
The following is a screen of project with labels.

4 - 50 4.6.5 Verifying revisions

 4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

1
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
This section explains how to utilize projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer, and files

OVERVIEW
(ASCII files) created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer in GX Works2. Projects edited with
GX Works2 can also be utilized in GX Developer.

2
■ Utilizing projects and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer
in GX Works2

CONFIGURATION
Projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer can be utilized in GX Works2 by using the

SYSTEM
'Open Other Project' function. (Section 4.7.1)

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Open Other Project function.

SCREEN
Project created with
GX Developer

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
Opened as a GX Works2 project.
Project created with GX

EDITING
IEC Developer
Open Other Project function.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 - 51
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

■ Utilizing files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer

ASCII files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer can be added as projects in GX
Works2 by using the 'Read ASC Format File' function. (Section 4.7.2)

Read ASC
Format File

■ Utilizing projects and data created with GX Works2 in GX Developer

Files created/edited in Simple project with GX Works2 can be utilized in GX Developer by using the
'Export to GX Developer Format File' function. (Section 4.8)

[Export to GX Developer
Format File]

4 - 52
 4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

■ Storage of utilized data in GX Works2 1

Each project and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer are stored in the areas shown
in the table below with GX Works2.

OVERVIEW
GX Developer projects are opened as Simple projects and GX IEC Developer projects, as Structured
projects.

● Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX Developer and GX Works2
2

CONFIGURATION
GX Works2 GX Works2
GX Developer
(Simple project) (Structured project)
Parameter Parameter Parameter

SYSTEM
Device Comment Global Device Comment Global Device Comment
Global variables Global Label Global Label
Program Program POU 3
FB FB_Pool FB/FUN

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Structure Structured Data Types Structured Data Types
Device memory Device Memory Device Memory

SCREEN
Device initial value Device Initial Value Device Initial Value

● Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX IEC Developer and GX
Works2 4
GX Works2
GX IEC Developer

MANAGEMENT
(Structured project)

PROJECT
User Library User Library
Parameter (Programmable controller parameter) Parameter
DUT_Pool (Structure) Structured Data Types
Global_Vars (Global variable) Global Label 5
Task_Pool POU
POU_Pool POU

PROGRAMS
EDITING
■ Security level of GX IEC Developer

The security level in the GX IEC Developer project is cleared after reading the project.
When the GX IEC Developer project is read using GX Works2, the following Enter Password screen is
6
displayed.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

■ Compatible applications
8
For 'Open Other Project' and 'Export to GX Developer Format File', the supported versions differ
SETTING DEVICE

according to the CPU type.

INITIAL VALUES

For the application compatibility, refer to Appendix 5.

4 - 53
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head

FX FX

Open a project created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer in GX Works2.

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Open Other Data] ⇒ [Open Other Project].

Operating procedure
• Specify the project, and click the button.
Select '*.gpj' for a GX Developer project and '*.pro' for a GX IEC Developer project.
The selected project is opened.

■ Considerations for opening projects in other formats

● Status after opening a different format project with labels

When a different format project with labels is opened, the project is in the uncompiled status. Compile
all programs in the project before executing online operations such as writing data and monitoring.
When a compilation error occurs, correct the corresponding program according to the programming
manual.
● When a programmable controller type of project which is created in GX Developer is not
supported by GX Works2
Open the project by starting GX Developer.
● Opening different format projects that contain SFC programs
• Block information data such as: block information devices, block titles and block statements, are
set in the block data property.
• When a GX Developer format project in which a ladder block contains an uncompiled SFC
program is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.87R or later using the [Open Other Project] function, a
'Block' with a corresponding block name sequence number may be missed.

4 - 54 4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats

 4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

● Opening different format projects that contain ST programs 1

Since the argument type or the number of arguments in some ST instruction is different between GX
Developer and GX Works2, an error may occur at compilation. When a compilation error occurs,

OVERVIEW
correct the instruction according to the structured programming manuals.
Note that, however, programs can be compiled in GX Works2 by setting the following option.
• Select "Use Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer, GX IEC Developer" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options]
⇒ "Project" ⇒ "Common Setting".
2
● Setting common pointer number

CONFIGURATION
When the common pointer number is not set in the PLC parameter setting of GX Developer, a
compilation error may occur at the compilation after opening the project in other format. In such case,

SYSTEM
change "Common Pointer No." on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter or change the pointer
device range in the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function.
● Utilizing detailed settings for Write to PLC function
Values set in GX Developer are utilized to the secured steps for Online program change
3

CONFIGURATION AND
(Section 12.1.1) and the writing range of device comment (Section 12.1.3) which are set

BASIC OPERATIONS
when writing data to programmable controller CPU.
Note that "PLC comment write format (CPU Format)" which is set along with the writing range of

SCREEN
device comment in GX Developer is not utilized.
For a project in which the comment capacity is restricted by setting "PLC comment write format (CPU
Format)" in GX Developer, the comment capacity may be exceeded when data are written to a
programmable controller CPU using GX Works2.
4
In such a case, set "Comment Format (PLC Format)" (Section 12.1.3) or reduce the writing

MANAGEMENT
range of device comment.

PROJECT
● Utilizing option settings
GX Developer option setting "Copy source/display source of reference during comment edit" is
utilized to GX Works2 option setting "Program Editor" ⇒ "All Editors" ⇒ "Device Comment" ⇒
"Reference of Device Comment". 5
● Opening a GX IEC Developer project
When a GX IEC Developer project that contains a user library is opened, the following message may

PROGRAMS
be displayed and the user library may not be read. If the following message is displayed, select

EDITING
[Project] ⇒ [Library] ⇒ [Install] in GX Works2 to obtain the user library.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

When a GX IEC Developer project is read by selecting [Project] ⇒ [Open Other Data] ⇒ [Open Other
Project], intelligent function module parameters are not reflected. 7
● When a GX Developer data name contains a character that cannot be used in GX Works2
SETTING DEVICE

A GX Developer project with a GX Works2 invalid character can be opened.

MEMORY

Note that, however, the invalid character in the data is replaced by an underscore (_).*1 Change the
data name after opening the project.
*1 : For FXCPU, data which contains invalid characters in its data name is not read.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats 4 - 55

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.7.2 Reading ASC format data

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

Add ASC format data created in GX IEC Developer to a GX Works2 project being edited.
Data can be added only when a new project is created or a project is opened in Structured project.

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Open Other Data] ⇒ [Read ASC Format File].

Operating procedure
• Specify the file, and click the button.
Select '*.asc' for the file.
The specified data is added to the project.

● Importing project data of different programmable controller type

Project data having a different programmable controller type can be imported to a project being edited.
The programmable controller type of the project being edited is not changed even when data with the different
programmable controller type are imported.
In this case, since instructions and devices not supported by the open project are also imported, compile the programs
to check and correct errors after importing data.
● Importing data whose name already exists in the project
A number is appended in serial order (starting from one) to the end of the data name to be imported, and then the data
is added to the project.
● Importing global labels
When the global labels are imported, the "Device" column of the global label may be blank. If the "Device" column is
blank, check the items on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
● Importing FBD programs of GX IEC Developer
Imported FBD programs are converted to Structured Ladder programs.

4 - 56 4.7.2 Reading ASC format data

 4.8 Saving projects in other formats

1
4.8 Saving projects in other formats
*1 *2

OVERVIEW
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head
FX FX

*1 : Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU

*2 : Not supported by L02S, L06 and L26.
2
This section explains how to save a Simple project of GX Works2 in the GX Developer format.

CONFIGURATION
Screen display

SYSTEM
Select [Project] ⇒ [Export to GX Developer Format File].

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Operating procedure
5
1. Select the save destination of the GX Developer format project.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
2. Enter the project name, and click the button.

6
● Considerations for saving projects
For the restrictions other than the ones described below, refer to Appendix 8.
• Programs are saved in the uncompiled status. PARAMETERS
SETTING

• Data cannot be saved when the security access level is set to other than 'Administrators'. Change the access level
before saving the data. (Section 4.10.4)
• The data with a block password cannot be saved. Unlock the block password before saving the data.
(Section 4.12.3) 7
• Projects in which labels are used for FXCPU cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
• When a GX Developer format project is saved to the folder in which a GX Developer format project with the same
SETTING DEVICE

name exists, the previously saved project is overwritten.

If the saving of the project failed, all data except for the data created by user will be deleted.
MEMORY

● Considerations for handling projects in GX Developer

• Since the program is saved uncompiled, the program needs to be compiled when it is opened in GX Developer. For
projects with labels, the compilation results and device assignment may be different from those of GX Works2.
• For a maintenance work on the same programmable controller CPU using both GX Developer and GX Works2, 8
programming with actual devices is recommended.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 - 57
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head

FX FX

Start a new GX Developer project from GX Works2.

GX Developer needs to be installed in advance to perform this function.

For details of GX Developer installation, refer to Appendix 14.
For details of GX Developer operation, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual

Operating procedure
• Select [Project] ⇒ [Start GX Developer].

4 - 58
 4.10 Setting Security for Projects

1
4.10 Setting Security for Projects

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains how to set security for projects to protect the projects themselves and the data
in projects.
2
Setting security not only restricts an access to projects but also prevents the data, such as POUs,

CONFIGURATION
device comments, and parameters, that are created by the user from erroneous modification and/or
disclosure to unauthorized users.

SYSTEM
This function cannot restrict writing/reading of data to/from a programmable controller CPU. Use the
online password function to protect the data on a programmable controller CPU. (Chapter 13)
3

CONFIGURATION AND
Access levels and access authority

BASIC OPERATIONS
■

An access to data can be restricted by setting an access level to the individual user.

SCREEN
An access level is an operating authority given to a login user of the project.
There are five access levels as shown below. The data that can be edited by a user having lower
access level can also be edited by a user who has higher access level. 4
Access level Operating authority

MANAGEMENT
Higher <Administrator level>
Administrators
All operations are possible.

PROJECT
Developers (Level 3)
<Developer level>
Developers (Level 2)
Security setting, data access, and a part of operations are restricted.
Developers (Level 1)
<Operator level>
5
Users Only access to project data is possible.
Lower Data cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU.

PROGRAMS
Example) The data with access authority of Developers (Level 2) can be edited by a login user

EDITING
whose access level is Developers (Level 2) or higher (Administrators, Developers (Level
3) or Developers (Level 2)).
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 - 59
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

■ Access authority applicable data

The following tables show the data to which access authority can be applied.
● Simple project
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Items on Project view Read Write
Parameter  
Intelligent Function Module*1 × ×
Intelligent function module data  
Global Device Comment  
Global Label × ×
Global label data × 
Program Setting × ×
Program file data × ×
POU × ×
Ladder program data × ×
Program  
Local Label × 
ST program data*1 × ×
Program  
Local Label × 
SFC program data × ×
SFC block × ×
Program  
Local label*1 × 
FB_Pool × ×
Program  
Local label × 
Structured Data Types × ×
Structure data × 
Local Device Comment × ×
Comment data  
Device Memory × ×
Device memory data  
Device Initial Value*1 × ×
Device initial value data × ×
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.

4 - 60
 4.10 Setting Security for Projects

● Structured project 1
: Applicable ×: Not applicable
Items on Project view Read Write

OVERVIEW
Parameter  
Intelligent Function Module*1 × ×
Intelligent function module data  
Global Device Comment   2
Global Label × ×

CONFIGURATION
Global label data × 
Program Setting × ×

SYSTEM
Program file data  
POU × ×
Program × ×
Ladder program data*1 × × 3

CONFIGURATION AND
Program  

BASIC OPERATIONS
Local Label × 
ST program data × ×

SCREEN
Program  
Local Label × 
SFC program data*1 × × 4
Program  
Local Label × 

MANAGEMENT
Structured Ladder/FBD program data × ×

PROJECT
Program  
Local Label × 
FB/FUN × ×
Program   5
Local label × 
Structured Data Types × ×

PROGRAMS
Structure data × 

EDITING
Local Device Comment × ×
Comment data  
Device Memory × ×
6
Device memory data  
Device Initial Value*1 × ×
Device initial value data × × PARAMETERS
SETTING

*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 - 61
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.10.1 Setting/resetting security of projects

Set security for an open project and reset the security.

■ Setting security for projects

Set security for a project.

Once security is set for a project, user authentication is required when the project is opened once
again. (Section 4.10.3)

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Security] ⇒ [User Management].

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
User Name corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets
are case-sensitive.)
Access Level Display 'Administrators'. (Fixed)
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
Password corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are case-
sensitive.)
Re-enter Password Set the same password again for confirmation.

2. Click the button.

Security is set for the project.

● Setting security
When security is set for a project, the project is in the status logged in by the set user (Administrators). The current login
user can be checked in the status bar. (Section 3.2.6)
● Loss of login password
If a user forgets the login password, logging in to the project is disabled. Remember the password securely. If the user
whose access level is Developers (Level 3) or lower forgets the password, log in the project using the access level
'Administrators' and set the password again.

4 - 62 4.10.1 Setting/resetting security of projects

 4.10 Setting Security for Projects

■ Resetting security of projects 1

Reset the set security of a project by deleting all users, and returns the project to the status without
security. (Section 4.10.2)

OVERVIEW
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users 2

CONFIGURATION
Manage the registered status of users for a project with security. This function also adds/deletes/
changes users.

SYSTEM
This function is available only when a project is logged in by the user whose access level is
'Administrators' or 'Developers'.

3
Screen display

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Select [Project] ⇒ [Security] ⇒ [User Management].

SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6
Display contents
Item Description
PARAMETERS
Number of User Registrations Display the number of registered users and the maximum number of registrations.
SETTING

User Name Display the registered user names.

Access Level Display the access level of each registered user.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users 4 - 63

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Screen button
●
Adds a user. ('■ Adding users')
●
Deletes a user selected in the list.
The current login user cannot be deleted. If registered users are only 'Administrators' and there are
no other users to be deleted, deletion of the current login user is possible.
If 'Administrators' level users are deleted, security is reset.
●
Changes the information of the user selected in the list. ('■ Changing user information')
●
Changes the password of the user selected in the list. ('■ Changing passwords')
The password of the current login user cannot be changed using this function. To change it, select
[Project] ⇒ [Security] ⇒ [Change Password].

■ Adding users

Add a user to a project with security.

A user whose access level is higher than that of the login user cannot be added.

Operating procedure
1. Click the button on the User
Management screen.
The User Addition screen is displayed.

2. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
User Name corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets are
case-sensitive.)
Access Level Select the access level.
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
Password corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are case-
sensitive.)
Re-enter Password Set the same password again for confirmation.

3. Click the button.

The user is added.
The added user is displayed in the User Management screen.

4 - 64 4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users

 4.10 Setting Security for Projects

■ Changing user information 1

Change the user information (user name and access level) of registered users.
The information of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of login user

OVERVIEW
cannot be changed.

Operating procedure
2
1. Click the button on the User

CONFIGURATION
Management screen.
The Change User Data screen is displayed.

SYSTEM
2. Set the items on the screen.
Setting items Section 4.10.1 3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
3. Click the button.
The user information is changed.

SCREEN
■ Changing passwords
4
Change the password of the user selected in the list on the User Management screen.
The password of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of the login user

MANAGEMENT
cannot be changed. To change the password of the login user, use the Change password function by

PROJECT
selecting [Project] ⇒ [Security] ⇒ [Change Password].

Operating procedure
5
1. Click the button on the User
Management screen.
The Change Password screen is displayed.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
2. Set "New Password" and "Re-enter Password".

3. Click the button.

6
The password is changed.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users 4 - 65

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.10.3 Logging in projects

A user authentication procedure is required when opening a project with security.

Screen display
Screen display when a project with security is opened.

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
User Name Enter the user name registered to the project to be logged in.
Password Enter the password.

2. Click the button.

Login authentication is performed with the entered user name and password. The project is
opened when the entry is confirmed to be correct.

● Checking login status

The current login user can be checked in the status bar. (Section 3.2.6)

4 - 66 4.10.3 Logging in projects

 4.10 Setting Security for Projects

4.10.4 Changing access authority of access level 1

Set an authorization of displaying/saving data for each access level.

OVERVIEW
The access authority of access levels higher than that of the login user cannot be changed.
If the access level of the current login user is 'Users', changing the access authority is not allowed.

Screen display 2

CONFIGURATION
Select [Project] ⇒ [Security] ⇒ [Data Security Setting].

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
Operating procedure

EDITING
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description 6
Access Object Select one or more data for which access authority is changed.
Access Authority Set 'enable/disable' of reading/writing data for each access level by moving the slider.*1
*1 : When multiple data are selected, the default access authority setting is displayed. Click the slider to set the PARAMETERS
SETTING

displayed access authority as it is. The access authority will not be set by only selecting multiple data.

2. Click the button.

7
SETTING DEVICE

● Setting access authority

MEMORY

The access authority can also be set by right-clicking on a single data of which access authority is to be changed on the
Project view and selecting [Data Security Setting] from the shortcut menu. When multiple data are selected, the
shortcut menu is invalid.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.10.4 Changing access authority of access level 4 - 67

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.10.5 Considerations for using the security function

1) Read protected data

A name of read protected data is displayed in gray and cannot be opened.
On the screens of project verification and programmable controller verification, a lock mark icon is
appended.
The following figures are an example for the case that "Parameter", programs and local labels of
"MAIN1", and programs of "MAIN2" are read protected.
<Project view> <Project verification>

<Programmable controller verification>

2) Write protected data

The write protected data can be opened as the read only data.
3) Properties of data
The properties of the read/write protected data can be displayed, but cannot be edited.
4) Device comment display on ladder editor and the Sampling Trace screen
If the data of the device comment is set as read protected, the device comment is not displayed on
ladder editor or the Sampling Trace screen.
5) Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU using project with
security
When symbolic information*1 is read from a programmable controller CPU, the security settings
(settings on the Data Security Setting screen) of the data, which are not included in the symbolic
information, are set to their default.
If the settings on the Data Security Setting screen are changed, make settings again after reading
data from the programmable controller CPU.
Note that the block password*2 is not set to default even when the symbolic information is read.
Therefore, setting a block password to each POU is recommended.
*1 : Symbolic information (Section 12.1.5)
*2 : Block password (Section 4.12)

4 - 68 4.10.5 Considerations for using the security function

 4.11 Setting Security Key

1
4.11 Setting Security Key
*1

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only

This section explains how to control the access with a security key.
2

CONFIGURATION
■ Security key

The security key locks/unlocks projects and a programmable controller CPU.

SYSTEM
The lock can only be unlocked with a security key, and therefore project data and data in a
programmable controller CPU can be protected.
● For projects 3
Locked project can be opened or edited only by the users who registered the security key on the

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
personal computer.
● For programmable controller CPU
The following files can be written to/read from the locked programmable controller only by the users

SCREEN
who registered the security key on the personal computer.
• Symbolic information
• Program
4
• Parameter

MANAGEMENT
• Intelligent function module parameter

PROJECT
• Device comment
File writing/reading enabled

Data access/
5
editing enabled High-speed
Universal model QCPU
Key A Project data

PROGRAMS
Key A

EDITING
Unable to access/
edit data Key A
6
Unable to write/read files

PARAMETERS
Another user can unlock the locked project data or programmable controller CPU by importing/
SETTING

exporting the security key.

7
Export
File writing/reading enabled
SETTING DEVICE

Data access/
editing enabled High-speed
Universal model QCPU
MEMORY

Project data
Key A
Unlock
Unlock Key A
Key A

8
Data access/ Unlock
editing enabled Key A
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Import
File writing/reading enabled

4 - 69
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.11.1 Managing security key

Create a security key, and import/export/delete the security key.

Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Security] ⇒ [Soft Security Key Management].

Display contents
Item Description
Key Information Registered in the
–
Personal Computer
Name Display the name of the security key.
Creation date Display the date of creation of the security key.
Lock the project Display the lock applicability for the project.
Lock the CPU Display the lock applicability of the programmable controller CPU.
Expiration date Display the expiration date when an expiration date is set on the security key.

4 - 70 4.11.1 Managing security key

 4.11 Setting Security Key

Screen button
1
●
Imports the security key. ("■ Importing security key")

OVERVIEW
●
Exports the security key. ("■ Exporting security key")
● 2
Creates a security key. ("■ Creating a security key")

CONFIGURATION
●
Deletes the security key. ("■ Deleting security key")

SYSTEM
■ Creating a security key
3
Create a security key.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure

SCREEN
1. Click the button.
The New screen is displayed.
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
2. Enter a name and click the button. 5
The security key is created.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
● Considerations of created security key
Created security keys can be registered only by the user who logged in the personal computer.
The maximum number of security key registrations is 128 including created security keys and imported security keys
for each login user of personal computer. 6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.11.1 Managing security key 4 - 71

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

■ Importing security key

Import the security key which is exported previously to the personal computer.

Operating procedure
1. Click the button.
The Import screen is displayed.

2. Select the security file to be imported, and click the button.

The Password screen is displayed.

3. Enter the password set for the file when it was exported, and click the
button.
The security key is imported to the personal computer.

4 - 72 4.11.1 Managing security key

 4.11 Setting Security Key

■ Exporting security key 1

Export the security key.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select the security key to be exported, and click the button.
The Export screen is displayed.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
2. Set the items on the screen.

PROJECT
Item Description
Security Key Information –
Name Display the name of the security key. 5
Password –
Enter a password for the security file to be exported.

PROGRAMS
Password Set a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH.

EDITING
Re-enter password Set the same password again for confirmation.
Detailed settings –
Expiration date Set the expiration date of the security key. 6
Operation limit –
Lock the project Select whether to apply the security key setting to the project.
PARAMETERS
Select whether to apply the security key setting to the programmable controller
Lock the CPU
SETTING

CPU.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.11.1 Managing security key 4 - 73

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

3. Click the button.

The Save As screen is displayed.

4. Enter a name of the file to be saved.

5. Click the button.

The security key file is saved.

● Considerations of exported security files

Secure the exported security files strictly.

■ Deleting security key

Delete the security key registered on the personal computer.

Operating procedure
• Select the security key to be deleted, and click the button.
The following confirmation message is displayed.
Click the button to delete the security key.

● Considerations when deleting security key

The project cannot be opened if the security key which is used to lock the project is deleted.
Even when the security key with the same name is recreated after deleting the security key, it will not be the same
security key.
Take extra caution when deleting security keys.

4 - 74 4.11.1 Managing security key

 4.11 Setting Security Key

4.11.2 Locking project with security key 1

Lock the project with a security key.

OVERVIEW
Screen display
Select [Project] ⇒ [Security] ⇒ [Soft Security Key Management]. 2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Display contents 5
Item Description
Key Information Registered in the
Display the information of selected security key. (Section 4.11.1)

PROGRAMS
Personal Computer

EDITING
<<Project>> Display the screen to lock/unlock the project.
Project Information –
Project Name Display the name of the project.
Title Display the project title.
6
Security Key Information –

PARAMETERS
Name Display the name of the security key which is used to lock the project.
Creation date Display the date of creation of the security key which is used to lock the project.
SETTING

Explanation Display the information when the cursor is placed on the button on the screen.

Operating procedure 7
1. Select the security key to lock the project from "Key Information Registered in the
SETTING DEVICE

Personal Computer".
MEMORY

2. Click the button.

The project is locked with the selected security key.
8
Screen button
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

●
Unlocks the locked project.

4.11.2 Locking project with security key 4 - 75

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.11.3 Considerations of security keys

1) When GX Works2 is uninstalled

Security keys are not deleted even when GX Works2 is uninstalled.
2) Security status
When the security key is "Executable" at the point of opening the project, the security key is
handled under the authority of "Executable" while the project is being opened.
For example, even when the security key of the opened project is deleted and the "Inexecutable"
security key is imported, the security key is handled under the authority of "Executable" while the
project is being opened.
3) Project locked with security key
The following operations cannot be performed.
• Write to PLC/Read from PLC/Verify with PLC function with symbolic information, programs,
parameters, intelligent function module parameters, or device comments when "Memory Card
(SD)" is specified for the target memory
• Online program change function when "Memory Card (SD)" is specified for the write target.
• Write to PLC function with parameters when "Memory Card (SD)" is specified for the target
memory of "Comment File Used in a Command" on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
• Write IC Memory Card function
4) CPU module locked with security key
The following operations cannot be performed.
• Backup data creation function of PLC Module Change
• Data restoration function of PLC Module Change
• Write PLC User Data/Read PLC User Data function with latch data backup file created with the
Latch Data Backup function

4 - 76 4.11.3 Considerations of security keys

 4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects

1
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

This section explains how to set a block password to a POU in a project with labels.
Setting a block password to a POU disables browsing of program content. To browse program
content, the block password must be unlocked. 2

CONFIGURATION
The following table shows the POUs to which a block password can be set.

SYSTEM
Project type POU to which a block password can be set
Simple project (without labels) None
Simple project (with labels) Function block
Program block 3
Structured project Function block

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Function

SCREEN
● Effective range of block passwords
A block password is the function that protects POUs, not execution programs.
To protect execution programs, use the security function or online password function. 4
For FXCPU, however, whether to protect execution programs with a block password can be selected. (Setting block
passwords Section 4.12.2)

MANAGEMENT
● Considerations of project with security
To set/unlock/delete a block password in a project with security, a user who has a security access authority to read/

PROJECT
write the program needs to log in. (Security Section 4.10)
● Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU
Even when the symbolic information is read from a programmable controller CPU, the set status of block password
does not change.
5
● Considerations when using FXCPU
A memory cassette to which the execution program with a block password is written can be used on FX3U/FX3UC
version 3.00 or later only.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 - 77
 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.12.1 Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords

Manage the block password setting status of a POU.

In addition, this function sets/unlocks/deletes a block password.

Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Block Password].

Display contents
Item Description
POU Name Display POUs.
Registration Status Display the status of block password for each POU.

Screen button
●
Sets a block password to a POU. (Section 4.12.2)
●
Unlocks the block password set to the POU. (Section 4.12.3)
●
Deletes the registered block password. The block password of the POU must be unlocked before
deleting it.

● Selecting multiple POUs

Multiple POUs of "Function Block List" can be selected and the password can be set/disabled in batch.
The following is the consideration when the block password settings of selected POUs are different.
• POUs whose block password is different from the entered password are not unlocked.

4 - 78 4.12.1 Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords

 4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects

4.12.2 Setting/changing block passwords 1

Set a block password to a POU.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select a POU to set a block password on the <QCPU (Q Mode)/LCPU> 2
Block Password screen and click the

CONFIGURATION
button.
The Change Block Password screen is displayed.

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
<FXCPU>

SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
2. Set the items on the screen.

PROJECT
Item Description
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
Password corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are case- 5
sensitive.)
Re-enter Password Set the same password again for confirmation.

PROGRAMS
Read-protect the execution Select this to disable reading execution programs.

EDITING
program*1 Whenever this item is selected or cleared, the program must be compiled.
*1 : Supported by FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.

3. Click the button. 6

The block password is set to the selected POU.
PARAMETERS
Lock of the POU by the block password becomes effective when the project is opened once again. SETTING

● Display on the Project view

A POU with a block password is displayed on the Project view as shown below. 7
SETTING DEVICE

A lock mark is appended to the icon of

MEMORY

POU to which a block password is set.

8
● Changing block passwords
SETTING DEVICE

To change a block password, simply set a new password for the POU to which a block password has already been set.
INITIAL VALUES

However, the block password must be unlocked before changing it.

4.12.2 Setting/changing block passwords 4 - 79

 GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.12.3 Unlocking block passwords

Unlock the block password set to a POU.

Browsing of POUs is enabled by unlocking block passwords.

Operating procedure
1. Select a POU to unlock the block
password on the Block Password
screen and click the
button.
The Unlock Block Password screen is
displayed.

2. Set the item on the screen.

Item Description
Password Enter the block password to be unlocked.

3. Click the button.

The block password of the selected POU is unlocked.
The unlock of the POU by the block password is valid while the project is being opened. To lock the
POU again, reopen the project.

4 - 80 4.12.3 Unlocking block passwords

 1

OVERVIEW
5 EDITING PROGRAMS 2

CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains the functions of the program editors used to edit sequence programs.

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
5.1 Programming 5-2

MANAGEMENT
5.2 Label Programming 5-2

PROJECT
5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects 5-4

5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects 5-9 5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5-1
 GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

5.1 Programming

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

For programming in each project, refer to the following manuals:

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

5.2 Label Programming

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

Programs can be standardized by using the label programming.

This function is available when a new program is created with the selection of "Use Label".
For projects without labels, the programming can be changed to the label programming by changing
the project type. (Section 4.5)

■ Features of label programming

● Since device assignment can be changed according to the equipment configuration by

creating general-purpose programs with the label programming, the programs with labels can
simply be utilized for other programs.
● Programs can be created using labels without knowing the equipment configuration.
● Labels and actual devices are associated as the equipment configuration is determined. This
function allows easier creation of execution programs.
● By simply specifying a label assignment method, devices are assigned automatically with the
program compilation function without being aware of device names/device numbers.
● Debugging can be performed effectively by monitoring/debugging programs without
changing label names.

5-2
 5.2 Label Programming

■ Terms used in label programming 1

The following are the terms used in the label programming.

OVERVIEW
Project view Term Description
New projects created with the selection of "Use Label" on the New
Label project
Project screen. (Section 4.2.1)
Data of information such as programs, global labels, and local labels,
required for label programming. (Section 12.1.5)
2
Symbolic information
These data are restored by writing/reading symbolic information to/

CONFIGURATION
from a programmable controller CPU.
Program data written with applicable programming languages.

SYSTEM
Program For label projects, these are data included in symbolic information even
when a program is created using devices only.
Programs executed on programmable controller CPUs.
Execution program Devices are assigned to labels with compilation, and execution
programs are created. 3

CONFIGURATION AND
Devices assigned to labels after compilation, or devices not written with

BASIC OPERATIONS
Actual device
labels.
Labels available for all program data when multiple program data are
Global label
created in a project.

SCREEN
Labels available for each program data only.
Local label
Labels and each program data are set one to one.

Device/label automatic-
A setting of types and ranges of devices assigned to labels. 4
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
assign setting
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

MANAGEMENT
Compilation An operation in which programs are converted to execution programs.

PROJECT
The following is an image of writing/reading label project data to/from a programmable controller CPU
in GX Works2.
< Writing data to programmable controller CPU >
5
GX Works2 (Label project)

PROGRAMS
Symbolic information

EDITING
Program Program Global label

Local label Local label

6
Write to PLC
Write to PLC Write to PLC

PARAMETERS
Programmable
controller CPU
SETTING

Execution program Execution program Symbolic information

< Reading data from programmable controller CPU >

Read from PLC 7
GX Works2 (Label project)
SETTING DEVICE

Symbolic information
MEMORY

Program Program Global label

Local label Local label

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5-3
 GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

This section explains the considerations for using label projects.

5.3.1 Editing programs

1) Label comments set on the label setting editor are displayed as comments to labels.
Comments created on the device comment editor are not displayed.
Up to 1024 characters can be set for label comments, however, the number of characters that can
be displayed is 32.
2) When the same label is set for global label/local label, the label comment set for local label
setting is displayed.
3) The index setting cannot be set when labels are used. Use actual devices to set the index
setting.

■ Considerations when editing programs

1) When an instruction in which data are stored to multiple word devices is used as shown
below, specify an array for the label in the storage destination of operation result.
• Division (Storing values such as quotient and remainder of division)
• Instructions such as the block data transfer instruction (BMOV)
[ Storage example when division is specified with array ]
a Setting
Label name : Value_A
Device type : Array (word)
Number of elements :2
Program : [/ D0 D1 Value_A]

2 words required
b Operation result
Value_A[0] Value_A[1]
Operation result of [/ D0 D1 Value_A] (Quotient) (Remainder)

5-4 5.3.1 Editing programs

 5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects

2) When setting arrays, be aware of device types and the number of elements in the data 1
storage destination.
If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.

OVERVIEW
[ Example of incorrect device type setting ]
a Setting
Label name : Value_A
Device type : Double word
Program : [D* D0 D2 Value_A]

b Operation result
4 words required 2
Data register

CONFIGURATION
Device range assigned
Device range for storing operation result
to Value_A d [1]
d [2]
Overwritten device range

SYSTEM
Device range used d [3]
by other labels d [4]
d [5]

For the above example, assign 4 words to the label (Value_A) in the storage destination of 3

CONFIGURATION AND
operation result.

BASIC OPERATIONS
To assign 4 words, set the following setting on the label setting editor.
Device type: Array (double word) Number of elements: 2

SCREEN
After compilation, the consecutive device ranges for 4 words are secured.
3) Do not overlap the device ranges which are stored as execution result of instruction when
assigning devices with global labels. 4
If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.
[ Example of incorrect device setting ]

MANAGEMENT
a Setting
Label name : Value_A

PROJECT
Device type : Array (Double word)
Number of elements :2
Device : D100
Program : [D* D0 D2 Value_A]

Label name
Device type
: Value_B
: Double word
4 words required
5
Device : D102
Program : [* D10 D11 Value_B]

2 words required

PROGRAMS
b Operation result
Data register

EDITING
Device set for
D100
Value_A Device range for storing operation result
D101
Device set for
D102
Value_B Overwritten device range
D103
D104
6
For the above example, assign the device of label (Value_B) to D104.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5.3.1 Editing programs 5-5

 GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

5.3.2 Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to

PLC/Online program change)

■ Writing symbolic information

1) In order to restore programs by reading symbolic information from the programmable

controller CPU, write symbolic information.
Symbolic information can be written by selecting the following item on the execution screen of
Write to PLC/Online program change.
• Write to PLC: Symbolic Information
• Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC
Note that symbolic information and execution programs can be written to separate memories.
Specify the write destination memory for "Target Memory". The default setting of write destination
memory for symbolic information can be changed in the option setting. Set "Setting for Save
Destination of Symbolic Information to PLC" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Symbolic Information".
< Write to PLC >
GX Works2
Symbolic information and all execution programs
are selected when "Symbolic Information" is selected.
Symbolic information
The program which is consistent with the symbolic
information can be written to the programmable
Program 1 Program 2
controller CPU.
Local label Local label

Perform the Write to

PLC/Online program
change operation on
label program
Programmable
controller CPU
< Online program change >
Execution program 1 Execution program 2 Symbolic information

When the Write to PLC/Online program change operation is performed on execution programs
only, program inconsistency occurs. This operation must be performed on both symbolic
information and execution programs.
2) When writing data to a programmable controller CPU, the confirmation message asking "Do
you want to overwrite?" may be displayed as corresponding to the execution programs.
The symbolic information will not be written normally if "No" was selected. Perform the data
write operation again, and complete the operation normally.

■ Writing execution programs only

1) When an area to store symbolic information cannot be secured on the programmable

controller CPU, write execution programs only.
Projects contain symbolic information must be kept securely on a personal computer.
2) Write execution programs without selecting the following item.
• Write to PLC: Symbolic Information
• Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC

5-6 5.3.2 Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change)
 5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects

5.3.3 Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read 1

from PLC)

OVERVIEW
■ Reading symbolic information

1) Execute the Read from PLC operation with a label project. 2

2) When reading data from a programmable controller CPU, specify the memory to which the

CONFIGURATION
symbolic information is stored for "Target Memory" of symbolic information.
3) Do not perform the Read from PLC operation on the symbolic information when the

SYSTEM
symbolic information and the execution programs on the programmable controller CPU are
not consistent.
When the symbolic information is read with program inconsistency, the execution programs which
are running on the programmable controller CPU cannot be restored. Check the date of the Write
3

CONFIGURATION AND
to PLC operation which was performed on the symbolic information and the execution programs,

BASIC OPERATIONS
and prevent from performing the Read from PLC operation with program inconsistency. Date of the
data write operation can be checked with the column of "Last Change" on the Online Data

SCREEN
Operation screen for "Delete PLC Data".

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
The following are the considerations when symbolic information needs to be read with program
inconsistency.
5
• Create backup data of symbolic information on a personal computer before performing the Read
from PLC operation.

PROGRAMS
Symbolic information on a personal computer will be overwritten with symbolic information on a

EDITING
programmable controller CPU. To prevent from erasing the latest symbolic information, save the
project and create backup data of symbolic information.
• The following message is displayed when the Read from PLC operation is performed with 6
program inconsistency.
Follow the instruction described in the message.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5.3.3 Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC) 5-7
 GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

■ Reading execution programs only

1) Do not read execution programs only.

When only the execution programs needs to be read, read them with a project without labels.
The following warning message is displayed when the execution programs created from the
symbolic information are read with a project without labels.

5.3.4 Verifying programs

Symbolic information cannot be verified. The program verification operation can be performed on
execution programs only.

5.3.5 Monitoring programs

Programs created with labels can be monitored.

Programs with labels registered to the Watch window can be monitored.

5-8 5.3.4 Verifying programs

 5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects

1
5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

This section explains how to convert/compile an edited project to convert it into the code executable
on the programmable controller CPU.
2
The type of conversion/compilation differs according to the project type as shown in the table below.

CONFIGURATION
Project type Conversion/compilation type Description

SYSTEM
Build Fix changes.
Fix changes, and simultaneously, write the difference between the fixed
Simple project
Online Program Change programs and the programs stored on the programmable controller CPU
(without labels)
to the programmable controller CPU.
3
Rebuild All Convert all programs.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Convert and compile uncompiled data (programs, structures, labels and
Build
functions/function blocks).
Simple project Convert and compile data, and simultaneously, write the difference

SCREEN
(with labels)/ Online Program Change between the fixed programs and the programs stored on the
Structured project programmable controller CPU to the programmable controller CPU.
Convert and compile all data (programs, structures, labels and functions/
Rebuild All
function blocks). 4
For details, refer to the following manuals:

MANAGEMENT
Section 12.9 "Online Program Change"
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)

PROJECT
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5-9
 GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

MEMO

5 - 10
 1

OVERVIEW
6 SETTING PARAMETERS 2

CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains the setting items, operations on the setting screens, and common notes on
parameter settings.

SYSTEM
For necessary information and details of settings, refer to the manuals of each module to be used.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters 6-2

MANAGEMENT
6.2 Setting Redundant Parameters 6 - 18

PROJECT
6.3 Setting Network Parameters 6 - 19

6.4 Setting Remote Password 6 - 57 5

6.5 Checking Parameters 6 - 59

PROGRAMS
6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files 6 - 60

EDITING
6.7 Setting default parameters 6 - 62
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6-1
 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains how to set PLC parameters.

Screen display
Select Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "PLC Parameter".

Display contents
Item Description
The setting items are categorized under tabs according to their purpose.
• The parameter setting status is displayed by different font colors of the tab names.

Font color Setting status

Status that data is not set under the tab
Red
(Data must be set under the tab for operation.)

Tab Status that data is set under the tab

Blue
(A red tab name changes to blue after data is set.)
Default values
Magenta
(The user settings are not set under the tab.)
Values other than default values
Dark blue
(A magenta tab name changes to dark blue after data is set.)
• Details of the setting items Section 6.1.1

6-2
 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

Screen button
1
●
Executes printing. (Section 20.7)

OVERVIEW
●
Executes print preview. (Section 20.9)
● (Not supported by FXCPU) 2
Checks the X/Y setting made on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter or in the network

CONFIGURATION
parameter.
●

SYSTEM
Resets all setting items on the screen being open to their defaults.
●
Checks whether the user-set parameters on the screen being open are correct. 3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
● Considerations when changing PLC parameters

SCREEN
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, all programs need to be compiled when the following PLC parameters are changed.
• "Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab
• "File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab
• Settings on the <<Device>> tab
4
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program
change remain on the device-assigned labels.

MANAGEMENT
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.

PROJECT
• For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device
memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
• For FXCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function, 5
and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 17.4)
For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.

PROGRAMS
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)

EDITING
● Function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator
• When GX Works2 is started up from MELSOFT Navigator, parameters that can be set by MELSOFT Navigator are
displayed with green background.
• A parameter set by the function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator cannot be edited. 6
To edit it, select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "iQ Works Interaction" and select "Enable an editing of parameters set in
MELSOFT Navigator".
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6-3
 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

The following table shows the applicable PLC parameter items for each programmable controller type.
For details of each item, refer to the following manuals.
(User's manuals and programming manuals of each CPU)

: Applicable –: Not applicable

Q series L series FX series

Setting tab name High Performance model QCPU/ Remote

Basic model Redund Communication
Universal model QCPU/ I/O LCPU FXCPU
QCPU ant CPU head module
Process CPU module
Communication Head
– – – – –  –
Setting
PLC Name    –   
PLC System*1       
PLC File    –  – –
PLC RAS       –
Boot File  *2  – *3 – –
Program –   –  – –
SFC    –  – –
Device    –  – 
I/O Assignment       –
Multiple CPU Setting *4 *4 – – – – –
Built-in Ethernet Port
– *5 – – *3 – –
Setting
Ethernet Port Setting – – – – – – *6
Built-in I/O Function
– – – –  – –
Setting
Serial Communication *7 *8 – – *9 – –
Memory Capacity – – – – – – 
Special Function Block – – – – – – 
Positioning – – – – – – 
Operation Setting – – –  –  –
*1 : For FXCPU, PLC System is separated into PLC System (1) and PLC System (2).
*2 : Not supported by Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U.
*3 : Not supported by L02S.
*4 : Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.
*5 : For Built-in Ethernet port QCPU only
*6 : For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only
*7 : For Q00/Q01 only
*8 : For Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/QnUD(H)CPU only
*9 : For L02S only

6-4 6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

■ PLC parameter setting items for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU 1

1) PLC Name

OVERVIEW
Item Description Remarks
Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller
Label –
CPU.
Comment Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU. – 2
2) PLC System

CONFIGURATION
Item Description Remarks

SYSTEM
Timer Limit Setting Set the time limit of the low-speed/high-speed timer. –
Set the contacts for controlling RUN/PAUSE of the programmable
controller CPU.
RUN-PAUSE Contacts –
PAUSE contact only setting is not available. (RUN contact only or
RUN contact + PAUSE contact setting is available.)
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Universal model QCPU/
Set the contact device for executing a latch data backup operation.
Latch Data Backup LCPU only
Operation Valid Contact Set whether to back up all files on the standard RAM when executing High-speed Universal

SCREEN
a latch data backup operation. model QCPU only
Remote Reset Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2. –
Output Mode at STOP to Set the status of output (Y) when the programmable controller is
RUN switched from STOP to RUN.
– 4
Floating Point Arithmetic High Performance
Set whether to perform floating-point processing in double precision.
Processing model QCPU only

MANAGEMENT
Intelligent Function Set the interrupt pointer assignment of the module.
–

PROJECT
Module Setting Set the start I/O number and start SI number of the module.
Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable
Module Synchronization –
controller CPU with that of the intelligent function module.
Built-in CC-Link Setting Set whether to set the built-in CC-Link. L26-BT/L26-PBT only
5
Not applicable to Basic
Common Pointer No. Set the start number of the common pointers used in the program.
model QCPU
Points Occupied by Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base

PROGRAMS
–
Empty Slot unit/extension base unit/block.

EDITING
Set the start number of the interrupt counters.
–
Set the execution interval for the interrupt pointers.
System Interrupt High Performance
Settings Set the fixed scan interval for high-speed interrupt pointers, high- model QCPU/High- 6
speed I/O refresh, and high-speed buffer transfer. speed Universal model
QCPU only

PARAMETERS
Interrupt Program/Fixed
Set whether to perform high-speed execution of an interrupt program. –
Scan Program Setting
SETTING

Not applicable to Basic

A-PLC Compatibility Set whether to use the MELSEC-A series special relays/special
model QCPU/
Setting registers (SM1000/SD1000 to SM1299/SD1299).
Redundant CPU
Service Processing Set the processing time and the number of times of service Universal model QCPU/ 7
Setting processing. LCPU only
SETTING DEVICE

Universal model QCPU/

PLC Module Change
Set this to replace the CPU module using a memory card. LCPU (except for L02S)
Setting
only
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list 6-5

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

3) PLC File

Item Description Remarks

Set the file register file to be used in the program. –
Universal model QCPU
File Register Set whether to transfer data to the standard ROM when executing a (except for High-speed
latch data backup operation. Universal model
QCPU)/LCPU only
Comment File Used in a Not applicable to Basic
Set the device comment file to be used in the program.
Command model QCPU
Set the device initial value file to be used on the programmable
Initial Device Value –
controller CPU.
Not applicable to Basic
File for Local Device Set the local device file to be used in the program.
model QCPU
File used for SP.DEVST/ Set the device data ROM write/read instruction file to be used in the Universal model QCPU/
S.DEVLD Instruction program. LCPU only

4) PLC RAS

Item Description Remarks

Set the WDT of the programmable controller CPU. –
WDT (Watchdog Timer) Set the WDT for an initial execution type program. –
Setting
High Performance
Set the WDT for a low-speed execution type program.
model QCPU only
Error Check Set whether to detect specified errors. –
Operating Mode When Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error
–
There is an Error is detected.
Constant Scanning Set the constant scan time. –
Set the storage destination for error histories of the programmable High Performance
Error History
controller CPU. model QCPU only
Low Speed Program High Performance
Set the execution time of a low-speed program in every scan.
Execution Time model QCPU only
Module Error History
Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function Universal model QCPU/
Collection (Intelligent
module. LCPU only
Function Module)
Process CPU/
Memory Check Set whether to check the memory of the program.
Redundant CPU only

5) Boot File

Item Description Remarks

Not applicable to Basic
Set whether to clear the program memory when booting up.
model QCPU
Boot Option
Set whether to write data in the memory card automatically to the Not applicable to Basic
standard ROM when booting up. model QCPU
Set the type, data name, transfer source drive, and transfer Not applicable to Basic
destination drive of the boot file. model QCPU
Boot File Setting
Basic model QCPU
Set whether to boot up with the standard ROM.
only

6-6 6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

6) Program 1
Item Description Remarks
Set the file name and execution type (executing condition) for

OVERVIEW
programs when several programs are written to the programmable
Not applicable to Basic
Program controller CPU.
model QCPU
Set the fixed scan interval (the execution interval of a fixed scan
execution type program).
File Usability Setting
Display the File Usability Setting screen.
Not applicable to Basic 2
button model QCPU

CONFIGURATION
I/O Refresh Setting High Performance
Display the I/O Refresh Setting screen.
button model QCPU only

SYSTEM
7) SFC

Item Description Remarks

SFC Program Start
Set the start-up mode of an SFC program. –
3
Mode

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Start Conditions Set the start-up condition of an SFC program. –
Output Mode When the
Set the SFC program output mode at block stop. –
Block is Stopped

SCREEN
8) Device

Item Description Remarks 4

Set the number of points used for each device of the programmable
Device Points –
controller CPU.

MANAGEMENT
Set the latch range (start device number/end device number)

PROJECT
Latch (1) Start/End clearable with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear –
operation.
Set the latch range (start device number/end device number) not
Latch (2) Start/End clearable with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear –
operation. 5
Set the range (start device number/end device number) of devices
Local Device Start/End –
used as a local device.
File Register Extended Universal model QCPU/

PROGRAMS
Set the extended data register and extended link register.
Setting LCPU only

EDITING
Indexing setting for Set the start number of Z to be 32-bit indexed, or use the index Universal model QCPU/
devices*1 register ZZ for 32-bit index setting. LCPU only

Latch interval
Set the device latch interval to be performed by the set interval or by
each scan.
High-speed Universal
model QCPU only
6
*1 : "Indexing Setting for ZR Device" is displayed for the programmable controller CPU other than High-speed Universal
model QCPU.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

9) I/O Assignment

Item Description Remarks

Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit/block.
– 7
I/O Assignment Universal model QCPU/
SETTING DEVICE

Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.

LCPU only
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module. –
MEMORY

Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of
Base Setting Not applicable to LCPU
the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list 6-7

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

10) Multiple CPU Setting

Item Description Remarks

Set the number of programmable controller CPUs used in the
No. of PLC
multiple CPU system.
Set the operation mode of the multiple CPU system when a stop
error occurs in any of the programmable controller CPU No. 2 to No. –
Operation Mode 4.
The multiple CPU system stops when a stop error occurs in the CPU
No. 1.
Host Station Set the CPU number for the host CPU. Universal model QCPU
Multiple CPU (excluding Q00UJ/
Synchronous Startup Select the CPU modules to be started up synchronously. Q00U/Q01U/Q02U)
Setting only

Set whether to allow Online module change in the multiple CPU Not applicable to Q00U/
Online Module Change
system. Q01U/Q02U
I/O Sharing When Using Set whether to retrieve the I/O status of the I/O module or intelligent
–
Multiple CPUs function module controlled by other programmable controller CPUs.
Set the CPU shared memory to enable data sharing among multiple
Communication Area
CPUs. –
Setting (Refresh Setting)
(Usable devices: B, M, Y, D, W, R, and ZR)
Multiple CPU High Universal model QCPU
Set the user setting area, auto refresh, assignment confirmation, and
Speed Transmission (excluding Q00U/Q01U/
system area.
Area Setting Q02U) only

11) Built-in Ethernet Port Setting

Item Description Remarks

IP Address Setting Set the IP address and the input format of the IP address.
Communication Data
Select the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.
Code
Built-in Ethernet type
Open Setting button Set the protocol, open system, and host station port number.
CPU only
FTP Setting button Select whether to use the FTP function.
Set whether to use the SNTP function, and set the timing of setting
Time Setting button
the time.
Simple PLC
Set the communication pattern and the communication settings. LCPU only
Communication Setting
Universal model QCPU
(except for Q00UJ/
IP Packet Transfer
Set whether to use the IP Packet Transfer function. Q00U/Q01U/Q02U)/
Setting
LCPU (except for L02S)
only

12) Built-in I/O Function Setting

Item Description Remarks

Set the parameters of the positioning axis 1 setting and positioning
Positioning
axis 2 setting.
Set the operation mode of high-speed counter CH1 setting and high-
High-speed Counter
speed counter CH2 setting. LCPU only
Set the input signal function, input response time, and interrupt
Input Signal
processing condition.
Output Signal Select the output signal function and error time output mode.

6-8 6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

13) Serial Communication 1

Item Description Remarks
Transmission Speed Set the transmission speed.

OVERVIEW
Sum Check Set the sum check.
–
Transmission Wait Time Set the transmission wait time.
Online Change Set whether to allow Online program change.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list 6-9

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ PLC parameter setting items for communication head module

1) Communication Head Setting

Item Description Remarks

Set the operation mode of the network.
Set the network number of the module.
CC-Link IE Field CC IE Field head
Network Setting Set the station number of the module. module only
Set whether to hold (store) the error history and system error history
on a flash ROM at power OFF or reset.
Set the operation mode of the network.
SSCNET III/H Network SSCNET III/H head
Setting Set whether to hold (store) the error history and system error history module only
on a flash ROM at power OFF or reset.

2) PLC Name

Item Description Remarks

Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller
Label
CPU. –
Comment Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU.

3) PLC System

Item Description Remarks

Remote Reset Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2. –

4) PLC RAS

Item Description Remarks

Module Error History
Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function
Collection (Intelligent –
module.
Function Module)

5) Operation Setting

Item Description Remarks

Assignment Method Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.
Forwarding Parameter Set transmission source devices and transmission destination –
between Devices devices.

6) I/O Assignment

Item Description Remarks

Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
I/O Assignment –
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.

6 - 10 6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

■ PLC parameter setting items for remote I/O module 1

1) PLC system

OVERVIEW
Item Description Remarks
Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable
Module Synchronization –
controller CPU with that of the intelligent function module.
Points Occupied by
Empty Slot
Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base
unit/extension base unit.
– 2

CONFIGURATION
2) PLC RAS

SYSTEM
Item Description Remarks
Error Check Set whether to detect specified errors. –
Operating Mode When Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error
–
There is an Error is detected. 3

CONFIGURATION AND
3) Operation Setting

BASIC OPERATIONS
Item Description Remarks

SCREEN
Assignment Method Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.
Forwarding Parameter Set transmission source devices and transmission destination –
between Devices devices.
4
4) I/O Assignment

MANAGEMENT
Item Description Remarks
Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O

PROJECT
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
I/O Assignment –
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.
Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of
5
Base Setting –
the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list 6 - 11

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

● Utilizing existing data to set parameters of multiple CPU

Parameters for multiple CPU can be set by utilizing existing data by clicking the button on the
<<I/O Assignment>>/<<Multiple CPU Setting>> tab.
Specify the project to be utilized, read the message, and then execute the function.

● Reading mounting status of programmable controller CPU

The mounting status of the programmable controller CPU can be read and overwritten to the current parameters by
clicking the button on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab. Read the message and execute the
function.

● "Index Setting for ZR Device" on the <<Device>> tab.

When "Use ZZ" is set for the 32-bit index setting, the ZZ device cannot be used or monitored independently in the
program.

X0
[DMOV K0 ZR10ZZ0 ]
Usable

X1
[DMOV K0 ZZ0 ]
Not usable

To confirm the current value of the ZZ device, specify Z and set the display format to 32-bit integer, on the Device/
Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen.
● Program settings
Executing conditions set in the program setting of the PLC parameter are applied to "Program Setting" on the Project
view. Program settings can also be set on the Project view.
For details of program setting on the Project view, refer to Section 4.2.1

<Setting screen for PLC parameter> <Project view>

Execution types set in the Program

can be confirmed.

6 - 12 6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

■ PLC parameter setting items for FXCPU 1

For FXCPU, PLC parameter setting items differ according to the programmable controller type.

OVERVIEW
1) PLC Name

Item Description Remarks

FX1, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N,
Title Set a program title to be stored on the programmable controller CPU.
FXU, FX2N, FX3G, FX3U, 2
FX1NC, FX2C, FX2NC,

CONFIGURATION
FX3GC, and FX3UC only

2) PLC System (1)

SYSTEM
Item Description Remarks
Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU without the FX2N, FX3U, FX2NC,
Battery Less Mode
memory backup battery. and FX3UC only 3
Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU with the memory

CONFIGURATION AND
Battery Mode FX3G and FX3GC only

BASIC OPERATIONS
backup battery.
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
Select the modem initialization command for the remote access to the FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
MODEM Initialized

SCREEN
programmable controller CPU. FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
RUN Terminal Input
Select the input number to use the input (X) of the programmable FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC, 4
controller CPU as the external RUN/STOP terminal. FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only

MANAGEMENT
3) PLC System (2)

PROJECT
Item Description Remarks
Select a channel to be the connection target.
Channel selection
Applicable to FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
5
Operate
Communication Set whether to enable the communication setting.
Setting

PROGRAMS
Protocol*1 Select the communication protocol.

EDITING
Data Length*1 Select the data length.
Parity*1 Select the parity.
Stop Bit*1 Select the stop bit.
6
Transmission
Select the transmission speed.
Speed*1 FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
PARAMETERS
Header*1 Set the header. FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U,
FX1NC, FX2NC, and FX3UC
SETTING

Terminator*1 Set this to enable the terminator. only

Control Line*1 Set this to enable the control line.
H/W Type*1 Select the cable type used in the communication.
Control Mode Display the control mode. 7
Sum Check*1 Set this to add the sum check.
SETTING DEVICE

Transmission
Select the transmission control procedure.
Control Procedure*1
MEMORY

Station Number
Set the station number.
Setting*1
Time Out Judge
Time*1
Set the timeout period.
8
*1 : Not applicable when "Operate Communication Setting" is OFF.
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list 6 - 13

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

4) Device

Item Description Remarks

FX1, FXU, FX2N, FX3U,
Device Set the latch range. FX2C, FX2NC, and FX3UC
only

5) Memory Capacity

Item Description Remarks

FX0S, FX0, FX1, FX0N,
FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N,
Select the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU.
Memory Capacity*1 FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, and FX1S.
FX2C, FX2NC, FX3GC, and
FX3UC only
• Display the symbolic information capacity of a built-in memory based
Symbolic on the setting value of the memory capacity.
Information • Display the symbolic information capacity of a memory cassette by FX3U and FX3UC only
Capacity*2
clicking the button.
Set the comment capacity.
Comments Capacity
Not applicable to FX0 and FX0S.
File Register Set the file register capacity. FX0S, FX0, FX1, FX0N,
Capacity Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, and FX1. FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N,
FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
Program Capacity Set the capacity for sequence programs. FX2C, FX2NC, FX3GC, and
Set whether to use the Special Function Block Settings, Positioning FX3UC only
Special Function
Instruction Settings, and Built-in CC-Link/LT.
Memory Capacity
Applicable to FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
*1 : When the symbolic information is saved in a built-in memory or a memory cassette, the symbolic information is
deleted by changing the memory capacity and writing the parameters. In this case, write the symbolic information
again.
*2 : This item is not printed with the batch print function or the print window function.

6) Special Function Memory Capacity

Item Description Remarks

Set the initial value of special extension modules/blocks.
Special Function Set the Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting. FX3U and FX3UC only
Block
Special Function Block Settings Set the initial value of BFM.
• Set the bias speed, max. speed, creep speed, zero return speed,
acceleration time, deceleration time, and interruption input of DVIT FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, and
Positioning instruction for each axis. FX3UC only
• Set the details of the positioning table for each axis.

6 - 14 6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

7) Ethernet Port Setting 1

Item Description Remarks
Select whether to connect the Ethernet port, and if the port is

OVERVIEW
Channel
connected, select a channel.
IP Address Setting Set the IP address and the input format of the IP address.
Communication
Select the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.
Data Code
Disable direct
2
connection to Select whether to disable the direct connection with MELSOFT.

CONFIGURATION
MELSOFT FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, and
Do not respond to FX3UC only

SYSTEM
search for CPU on Select whether to respond to the CPU search on the network.
network
Open Setting button Set the protocol, open system, and host station port number.

Time Setting button

Set whether to use the SNTP function, and set the timing of setting the 3
time.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Log Record Setting Set the storage location for error logs on the Log Record Setting
button screen.

SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list 6 - 15

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters

Check duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters.

Screen display
Select Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "PLC Parameter" ⇒ .

Display contents
Item Description
XY No. Display the I/O number.
Display the content set in the network parameter.
n: Slot number of the module (excluding Ethernet)

Display on Network column Description

Network PLC network/CC IE (Slot n) MELSECNET, CC-Link IE
Remote I/O Net (Slot n) MELSECNET/H (Remote Master)
CC-Link (Slot n) CC-Link
Type
Blank Not set.

Display whether the I/O assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter.

I/O Display on I/O Assignment column Description

Assignment I/O Assignment I/O assignment is set.
Blank I/O assignment is not set.

Slot Display the slot, module type, number of occupied I/O points, and model name when the I/O
assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter.
Module Type
Display the I/O assignment status as shown in the table below when the I/O assignment setting in
Points the PLC parameter is not set and X/Y devices are assigned in the network parameter.

Item Description
Model Name "Slot" to "Points" Assignment of X devices
"Model Name" Assignment of Y devices

Display the module in which the first duplication is detected by parameter check.

Display on Duplication column Description

Duplication MNET/CC IE (Slot 1)

Network parameter of MELSECNET or CC-
to
Link IE (slot 1 to slot 16)
MNET/CC IE (Slot 16)
CC-Link CC-Link remote I/O

6 - 16 6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters

 6.1 Setting PLC Parameters

Screen button
1
●
Writes data on the Acknowledge XY Assignment screen to a CSV file. (Section 6.6)

OVERVIEW
● When a setting screen other than PLC parameter setting screen is being opened 2
When the MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen or the CC-Link Module Configuration screen is
displayed, since the setting is not completed, set data of the previous setting are checked for duplications.

CONFIGURATION
● Priority in the parameter check
The following table shows the priority in when GX Works2 checks the parameter settings.

SYSTEM
Priority Display
1 I/O assignment
2 MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 16) network refresh parameter 3
3 MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 15) network refresh parameter

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
· ·
· ·
· ·

SCREEN
17 MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 1) network refresh parameter
18 CC-Link remote I/O
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters 6 - 17

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.2 Setting Redundant Parameters

*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

*1 : Redundant CPU only

This section explains how to set redundant parameters.

Screen display
Select Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "Redundant Parameters".

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 6.1.

■ Redundant parameter setting items

1) Operation mode setting

Item Description
Start Mode Setting Set the device status when the system is powered ON or reset.
Set whether to check errors on the standby system.
Standby System Watch Setting
If an error occurs, the error can be checked with the PLC diagnostics function.
Debug Mode Setting Set whether to start an operation in the debug mode.
Backup Mode Setting Set whether to check the operating status consistency.

2) Tracking setting

Item Description
Tracking Device Setting Select a setting method for the tracking device.
Tracking Characteristics Setting Set the tracking transfer mode.

6 - 18
 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

1
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
This section explains how to set the network parameters.

OVERVIEW
Only the parameter settings of the following network are supported for LCPU and FXCPU.
LCPU : CC-Link IE Field Network, Ethernet, and CC-Link
FXCPU: CC-Link
2
■ Ethernet/CC-Link IE/MELSECNET parameter setting

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Screen display
Select Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "Network Parameter" ⇒ "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET"/
"CC IE Field" .
3
The screen below is a screen for MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet module configuration.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5
Screen button

PROGRAMS
● (Not supported by LCPU)

EDITING
Displays the Interlink Transmission Parameters screen.

●
Checks the I/O assignment setting set in the PLC parameter and the status of X/Y devices assigned 6
in the network parameter. (Section 6.1.2)

● PARAMETERS
SETTING

Displays the Routing Information screen.

●
Displays the Assignment Image screen of the refresh parameters. 7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6 - 19
 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

● (Redundant CPU only)

Displays the Group Setting screen.

●
Displays the Help - Network Setting screen for network range assignment.

●
Deletes the set parameters.
●
Checks whether the set parameters are correct.

●
Executes printing. (Section 20.7)
●
Executes print preview. (Section 20.9)

6 - 20
 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ CC-Link parameter setting 1

Screen display

OVERVIEW
Select Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "Network Parameter" ⇒ "CC-Link".
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
Screen button

MANAGEMENT
●

PROJECT
Executes printing. (Section 20.7)
●
Executes print preview. (Section 20.9)
5
● (Not supported by FXCPU)
Displays the details of the I/O assignment settings. (Section 6.1)

PROGRAMS
EDITING
●
Deletes the set parameters.
● 6
Checks whether the set parameters are correct.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

● Function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator

• Parameter items which can be set from MELSOFT Navigator are displayed in green when GX Works2 is started from
MELSOFT Navigator.
• Parameters which are set by the function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator cannot be edited. To edit, 7
select "Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "iQ Works
SETTING DEVICE

Interaction".
● Number of columns displayed on the CC-Link Module Configuration screen (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only)
A number of columns can be changed by selecting 4 or 2 columns for "Display number of columns for CC-Link list
MEMORY

setting" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Parameter".

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6 - 21
 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.3.1 Network parameter item list

*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

*1 : CC IE Field head module only

The following table shows the applicable network parameter types for each programmable controller
type.
For details of each item, refer to the following manuals.
(User's manuals and reference manuals of each module)

: Applicable −: Not applicable

Q series L series FX series

High Performance
Network type Universal
Basic model model QCPU/ Remote I/O CC IE Field head
model LCPU FXCPU
QCPU Process CPU/ module module
QCPU
Redundant CPU
CC-Link IE Controller
   – – – –
Network*1
CC-Link IE Field Network – –  –  – –
MELSECNET/10    – – – –
MELSECNET/H    – – – –
MELSECNET/H
–   – – – –
Remote I/O
Ethernet      – –
CC-Link       *2
*1 : CC-Link IE Controller Network modules with the function version D and a serial number whose first 5 digits are '10041' or higher are
supported.
For Process CPU and Redundant CPU, CC-Link IE Controller Network modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '10042' or
higher is required.
*2 : Supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

6 - 22 6.3.1 Network parameter item list

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ CC-Link IE setting 1

Item Description

OVERVIEW
Network Type Specify the network type (CC-Link IE) whose parameters are to be set.
Start I/O No. Set the start I/O number.
Network No. Set the network number.
Total Stations Set the total number of (slave) stations. 2
Group No.*1 Set the group number.

CONFIGURATION
Station No. Set the station number of a module.
Mode Set the mode.

SYSTEM
Specify I/O
Set the I/O master station.
Master Station*1
Specify Reserved
Specify the reserved station.
Network Range
Assignment/
Station*1 3
Network Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Configuration Identical Point
Settings Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
Assignment
(Common
parameters) Shared Group

SCREEN
Set the shared group of the group cyclic function.
Setting*2
Supplementary Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block data assurance per
Setting station, and operation setting for returning.
Set the parameter name, data link faulty station setting, output setting during CPU
4
Network Operation Settings*3
STOP, IP address setting, and other settings.

MANAGEMENT
Refresh Parameters Set refresh parameters.
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and

PROJECT
Interrupt Settings
other settings.
Set whether to set a station number by program or by parameter.
Specification method for station
The station number can be specified by program only when the normal station or the
number
local station is selected in a project for Universal model QCPU/LCPU. 5
Set whether to operate link device points and assignments of the slave station with the
Operate with parameter of host/
parameter set on the host station or the parameter set on the master station.
master station*4
This item can be set for sub-master station only.

PROGRAMS
Redundant Setting Set the system B mode.

EDITING
*1 : For CC-Link IE Controller Network only
*2 : For CC-Link IE Controller Network of Universal model QCPU only
*3 : For CC-Link IE Controller Network of Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U), IP address setting
only 6
*4 : For CC-Link IE Field Network only

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.1 Network parameter item list 6 - 23

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H setting

Item Description
Specify the network type (MELSECNET/10 mode or MELSECNET/H mode) whose
Network Type
parameters are to be set.
Start I/O No. Set the start I/O number.
Network No. Set the network number.
Total Stations Set the total number of (slave) stations.
Group No. Set the group number.
Mode Set the mode.
Specify I/O
Set the I/O master station.
Master Station
Specify Reserved
Specify the reserved station.
Station
Network Range Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Assignment
(Common Identical Point
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
parameters) Assignment
Supplementary
Set the transient setting, low-speed cyclic setting, and other settings.
Setting
Station Inherent
Set station inherent parameters.
Parameters
Refresh Parameters Set refresh parameters.
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
Interrupt Settings
other settings.
Set whether to operate the station as a control station or a normal station when the line
Operation at reconnection*1
is reconnected.
Baud Rate Setting*1 Set the baud rate on modules that support the twist bus.
Redundant Setting Set the system B mode.
*1 : For MELSECNET/H (control station) and MELSECNET/H extended mode (control station) only

6 - 24 6.3.1 Network parameter item list

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ MELSECNET/H Remote I/O setting 1

Item Description

OVERVIEW
Network Type Set "MELSECNET/H (remote master)".
Start I/O No. Set the start I/O number.
Network No. Set the network number.
Total Stations Set the total number of (slave) stations. 2
Mode Set the mode.

CONFIGURATION
Specify Reserved
Specify the reserved station.
Network Range Station
Assignment
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.

SYSTEM
(Common
parameters) Supplementary
Set the constant scan time and the maximum number of return stations in one link scan.
Setting
Refresh Parameters Set refresh parameters.
3
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
Interrupt Settings

CONFIGURATION AND
other settings.

BASIC OPERATIONS
Redundant Setting Set the system B mode.

SCREEN
■ Ethernet setting

Item Description 4
Network Type Specify "Ethernet".
Start I/O No. Set the start I/O number.

MANAGEMENT
Network No. Set the network number.

PROJECT
Group No. Set the group number.
Station No. Set the station number.
Mode Set the mode.
5
Operation Setting Set the common items for the module.
• Set data communication timer values.
Initial Setting
• Set IP addresses for DNS servers.

PROGRAMS
Open Setting Set parameters required for the open processing.

EDITING
Router Relay Parameter Set parameters for the router relay function of Ethernet.
Set information to link network number and station number with IP address for
Station No. IP Information communication target station or relay station when communicating with another station
programmable controller CPU via Ethernet. 6
Set FTP parameters such as the login name, password, command input monitoring
FTP Parameters*1
timer, and PLC monitoring timer.
General Setting Set the password, e-mail address, and inquiry interval for receiving mails. PARAMETERS
SETTING

Mail Server Name Set the SMTP server, POP server, and IP addresses for both servers.
E-mail Setting*1 Send Mail
Set addresses of send mail.
Address Setting
News Setting Set the notifying condition. 7
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
Interrupt Settings*1
SETTING DEVICE

other settings.
Set the system B, system switching settings when communication error occurs, and
Redundant Setting*2
MEMORY

other settings.
*1 : Not supported by remote I/O module.
*2 : The redundant setting cannot be set when "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is selected. (Different IP addresses cannot be
assigned to each system.)
8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.1 Network parameter item list 6 - 25

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

● Connecting MELSOFT products via Ethernet

When connecting a MELSOFT product (such as GX Works2) via Ethernet, select "MELSOFT Connection" for "Open
System" on the Ethernet Open Setting screen. For details of the setting, refer to Ethernet Interface Module User's
Manual.
'MELSOFT Connection' is supported by Q series-compatible E71 function version B modules with a serial number
whose first 5 digits are '02122' or higher.

6 - 26 6.3.1 Network parameter item list

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU CC-Link setting 1

Item Description

OVERVIEW
Number of Modules Set the number of CC-Link master/local modules.
Set the station information in the CC-
Select this to set station information on the CC-Link configuration window.
Link configuration window
Start I/O No. Set the start I/O number.
Set the Parameter Name, Data Link Disorder Station, Case of CPU Stop Setting,
2
Operation Setting Number of Exclusive Station, Expanded Cyclic Setting, Block Data Assurance per

CONFIGURATION
Station, and Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device.
Type Set the station type such as a master/local/standby master station.

SYSTEM
Station No.*1 Set the station number.
Master Station Data Link Type The setting is fixed to "PLC Parameter Auto Start" for the master station.
Mode Set the mode.
Transmission Speed*1 Set the transmission speed.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and/or
Total Module Connected
standby master stations connected to the master station.
Remote Input (RX)

SCREEN
Remote Output (RY)
Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw.
Remote Register (RWr)
Remote Register (RWw)
4
Ver.2 Remote Input (RX)
Ver.2 Remote Output (RY) Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw for the remote network

MANAGEMENT
Ver.2 Remote Register (RWr) additional mode.

PROJECT
Ver.2 Remote Register (RWw)
Special Relay (SB)
Set the devices to refresh the data of SB and SW.
Special Register (SW)
Retry Count Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs. 5
Automatic Reconnection Station Set the number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and/or
Count standby master stations that can be returned to the system in one link scan.

PROGRAMS
Standby Master Station No. Specify the station number of the standby master station.

EDITING
Specify the data link status when an error occurs on the programmable controller CPU
PLC Down Select
on the master station.
Scan Mode Setting Specify whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan.
Delay Time Setting Set the link scan interval delay time. 6
The setting screen and the setting items differ according to the selected/cleared status
of "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window".
• Cleared PARAMETERS
Set station information on the CC-Link Station Information screen. Set the settings
SETTING

such as the station type and the number of occupied stations.

Station Information Setting*2 A number of rows can be changed by selecting 16 or 8 rows for "Display number of
rows for CC-Link station information" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Parameter".
• Selected
Set station information on the CC-Link configuration window. In addition to the setting
7
items on the CC-Link Station Information screen, settings such as the module type
SETTING DEVICE

are set. The equipment configuration is displayed graphically.

Set the target station number and procedure registration (such as operating condition
Remote Device Station Initial Setting
MEMORY

and executing condition).

Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
Interrupt Settings*3
other settings.
*1 : For LCPU and CC IE Field head module only. 8
*2 : With the station information set on the CC-Link configuration window, only the corresponding setting items on the CC-Link
Station Information screen are printed when executing the batch print or print window function. The equipment
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

configuration on the CC-Link configuration window is not printed.

*3 : Not supported by CC IE Field head module and remote I/O module.

6.3.1 Network parameter item list 6 - 27

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ FXCPU CC-Link setting

This parameter setting is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

Item Description
Connection Block Select "Set" to set a CC-Link master block.
Special Function Block No. Specify the special function block number (0 to 7).
Operation Setting Set the Parameter Name, Data Link Disorder Station, and Case of CPU Stop Setting.
Type This setting is fixed to "Master Station" when "Set" is selected for "Connection Block".
This setting is fixed to "PLC Parameter Auto Start" when "Set" is selected for
Master Station Data Link Type
"Connection Block".
Mode Set the mode.
Set the total number of remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and/or intelligent
Total Module Connected
device stations (including reserve stations) connected to the master station.
Retry Count Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs.
Automatic Reconnection Station Set the number of remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and/or intelligent device
Count stations that can be returned to the system in one link scan.
Specify the data link status when an error occurs on the programmable controller CPU
PLC Down Select
on the master station.
Set the station type, exclusive counts, and other settings.
Station Information Setting A number of rows can be changed by selecting 16 or 8 rows for "Display number of
rows for CC-Link station information" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Parameter".
Set the target station number and procedure registration (such as operating condition
Remote Device Station Initial Setting
and executing condition).

6 - 28 6.3.1 Network parameter item list

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration 1

window

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

Network configuration and equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network can be set when "CC
IE Field (Master Station)" or "CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station)" is set in the CC-Link IE Field Network 2
parameter.

CONFIGURATION
Select "Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field configuration window" on the
MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen in advance.

SYSTEM
Screen display
Click the button on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module 3
Configuration screen.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
List of
stations 4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Equipment 5
configuration

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6
Operating procedure
PARAMETERS
1. Select the module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations'
SETTING

or 'equipment configuration'.
The slave station is added to the 'list of stations'.
The added module is displayed on the 'equipment configuration'. 7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Drag and drop

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window 6 - 29

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

2. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Mode Setting Select the mode by clicking .
Assignment Method Specify the assignment method by clicking .
Link Scan Time (Approx.) Display the approximate value of link scan time.
List of stations Display the list of stations which configure CC-Link IE Field Network.
Module No. "0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number' is displayed for slave station.
Display the module type of master station/slave station.
Model Name When the module information does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed.
Set this item after registering the profile.
Station No. Set the station number of the master station/slave station in the range from 1 to 120.
Display the station type of master station/slave station.
Station Type
Click the cell and select the station type displayed by clicking .
Set the RX/RY assignment for each slave station.
RX/RY Setting
Set RX/RY in 16-point unit.
Set the RWw/RWr assignment for each slave station.
RWw/RWr Setting
Set RWw/RWr in 4-point unit.
Display devices of the CPU module to which link devices of master/local module are link-
Refresh Device refreshed.
This item is displayed only when the refresh parameter is set.
Reserved/Error Invalid Display the setting status of reserved station/error invalid station for slave station.
Station Click the cell and select the reserved station/error invalid station displayed by clicking .
Alias Display the device name.
Comment Display the information set to comment 1 on the Property screen.
Station-specific mode
Display the station-specific mode of the module.
setting
Equipment configuration Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network graphically.

3. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Close with Reflecting the Setting].

Exit the settings of the CC-Link configuration window.

Screen button
● /
Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down. The station number does
not change even when the position of the module is moved.

6 - 30 6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

1
● Considerations when the selected status of "Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field
configuration window" is changed

OVERVIEW
The following are the considerations when editing the network configuration by changing selected/cleared status.
• Selecting the item
The network configuration of "CC IE Field (Master Station)" or "CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station)" set on the
MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen is set on the CC IE Field configuration window
automatically. 2
Note that, all modules of the network configuration are changed to general-purpose CC IE Field modules. The file

CONFIGURATION
size of parameter to be written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
• Clearing the item
The network configuration set on the CC IE Field configuration window is set on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/

SYSTEM
Ethernet Module Configuration screen automatically.
● Setting general-purpose CC IE Field modules
When a non-Mitsubishi module or a module which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a general-
purpose CC IE Field module.
A general-purpose CC IE Field module can be replaced with a specific module.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
(■ Replacing general-purpose CC IE Field module)

BASIC OPERATIONS
● Display of module name on the 'equipment configuration'
"Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'equipment configuration'.

SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window 6 - 31

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ Replacing general-purpose CC IE Field module

Replace a general-purpose CC IE Field module of slave station with a specific module.

Operating procedure
1. Select the general-purpose CC IE Field module to be replaced in the 'list of stations'
on the CC IE Field configuration window.

2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Change Module] ⇒ [Replace General CC IE

Field Module].
The Replace General CC IE Field Module screen is displayed.

List of modules
to be replaced

3. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Replacement Target –
Station Type Display the station type selected on the CC IE Field configuration window.
Display modules with the same condition as the one selected for "Replacement Target".
List of modules to be
Select the check box(es) on the "Station Number" column of the module to be replaced.
replaced
Two or more modules can be selected.
Replacement Candidate Select the module to be replaced with.

4. Click the button.

The general-purpose CC IE Field module in the list of stations is replaced with the module selected
for "Replacement Candidate".
The general-purpose CC IE Field module displayed on the 'equipment configuration' is replaced
with the module selected for "Replacement Candidate".

The general-purpose
module is replaced with
the selected module.

6 - 32 6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

Screen button
1
●
Selects all modules displayed on "Replacement Target".

OVERVIEW
●
Cancels the selected status of all modules selected for "Replacement Target".
2
■ Replacing to general-purpose CC IE Field module

CONFIGURATION
Replace a module of slave station to a general-purpose CC IE Field module.

SYSTEM
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to be replaced in the 'list of stations' on the CC IE Field 3
configuration window.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Change Module] ⇒ [Change to General CC IE
Field Module].

SCREEN
The module is replaced to the corresponding general-purpose CC IE Field module.

4
■ Changing transmission path method

MANAGEMENT
Change the transmission path method to line/star or ring.

PROJECT
Operating procedure
• Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Change Transmission Path Method] ⇒ [Line/ 5
Star]/[Ring].
The transmission path method is changed to the selected transmission path method.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
● Transmission path method and loopback function setting
The change of transmission path method and the loopback function setting on the CC IE Field Supplementary Setting
screen are linked. 6
When line/star is selected, the loopback function setting is disabled.
When ring is selected, the loopback function setting is enabled.
PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window 6 - 33

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ Setting supplementary functions

Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block data assurance per station, and
operation setting for returning.

Operating procedure
1. Select [CC-IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Supplementary Setting].
The CC IE Field Supplementary Setting screen is displayed.

2. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Link Scan Mode Setting Set the link scan mode.
Set whether to use the loopback function.
Loopback Function Setting
Select this item when the transmission path method is ring.
Set whether to assure block data per station for link refreshes between the CPU module
Block Data Assurance per
and the master/local module.
Station
Select this when including a remote device station in the network configuration.
Set whether to operate the station as a master station or a sub-master station when the
Operation Setting for Returning
station is reconnected.

3. Click the button.

The settings are applied to the CC IE Field configuration window.

● Transmission path method and loopback function setting

The change of transmission path method and the loopback function setting on the CC IE Field Supplementary Setting
screen are linked.
When "Use" is cleared for the loopback function setting, line/start is selected for the setting under [CC IE Field
Configuration] ⇒ [Change Transmission Path Method].
When "Use" is selected for the loopback function setting, ring is selected for the setting under [CC IE Field
Configuration] ⇒ [Change Transmission Path Method].

6 - 34 6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Assigning link devices equally 1

Assign link device points of all stations equally.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Equal Assignment].
The Equal Assignment screen is displayed.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
2. Set the items on the screen.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Item Description
RX/RY Equal Assignment
Start Station Set the start station number to be assigned equally.
End Station Set the last station number to be assigned equally. 5
Start No. Set the start number of the link device to be assigned equally.
Total Points Assigned Set the total number of link device points to be assigned equally.

PROGRAMS
RWw/RWr Equal Assignment

EDITING
Start Station Set the start station number to be assigned equally.
End Station Set the last station number to be assigned equally.
Start No. Set the start number of the link device to be assigned equally.
Total Points Assigned Set the total number of link device points to be assigned equally. 6

3. Click the button.

PARAMETERS
Link devices are assigned equally to the slave stations within the set range.
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window 6 - 35

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ Assign the equal number of link device points

Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.

Operating procedure
1. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Identical Point Assignment].
The Identical Point Assignment screen is displayed.

2. Enter the number of points to be assigned.

3. Click the button.

The equal number of points is assigned per stations.

■ Checking system configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network

Check whether the equipment configuration of CC IE Field is correct after setting the network
configuration on the CC IE Field configuration window.

Operating procedure
• Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Check] ⇒ [System Configuration].
The system configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network is checked.
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.

6 - 36 6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Performing parameter processing of slave station 1

Perform the processing relates to parameters of slave stations.

The applicable parameter processing differs according to the target slave station.

OVERVIEW
The setting status and setting values of the Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen can be
saved in the CSV file format.

CONFIGURATION
● Considerations when performing parameter processing
Check the following before performing the parameter processing.
• The programmable controller CPU set as a connection target is in STOP status.

SYSTEM
• The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter.
• The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC IE Field configuration.
3
Operating procedure

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
1. Select a module to which parameters are applied from the 'list of stations' on the
CC IE Field configuration window.

SCREEN
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Parameter Processing of Slave Station].
4
The Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of NZ2GF2B1-16D.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window 6 - 37

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

3. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Target Module Information Display the slave stations on which the parameter processing is performed.
Method selection Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking .
Display the parameters of the slave station.
Parameter Information
The selected parameters are the targets of the selected process to be executed.
Process Option Set this for the processing selected for "Method selection".

4. Click the button.

The parameter processing is performed.

Screen button
●
Selects all parameters of "Parameter Information".
●
Cancels the selected status of all the parameters selected for "Parameter Information".
●
Imports the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" saved in the CSV file
format in advance.
●
Saves the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" in the CSV file format.

6 - 38 6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Performing commands for slave stations 1

Perform commands for slave stations.

Applicable commands differ according to the target slave station.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select a module on which a command is performed from the 'list of stations' on the 2
CC IE Field configuration window.

CONFIGURATION
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] ⇒ [Command Execution of Slave Station].

SYSTEM
The Command Execution of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of NZ2GF2B1-16D.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6
3. Set the items on the screen.

PARAMETERS
Item Description
Target Module Information Display the information of target module on which the command is performed.
SETTING

Method selection Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking .
Set the writing values set for the processing selected for "Method selection".
Command Setting
For details, refer to the manual of the slave station being used. 7
4.
SETTING DEVICE

Select the button.

The command processing is performed.
MEMORY

The result of the processing is displayed on "Execution Result".

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window 6 - 39

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ Copying/pasting modules

Copy/paste a selected module.

Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No." or "Model Name" of the CC-Link module to be copied from the
'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.

Select "Module No."

or "Model Name".

2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Copy].

The selected module is copied.

3. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste].

The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.

● Selected status of modules

All cells on the 'list of stations' can be selected by selecting [Edit] ⇒ [Select All].

■ Deleting modules

Delete a selected module.

Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted from the 'list of
stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.

Select "Module No."

or "Model Name".

2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete].

The selected module is deleted.

6 - 40 6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Displaying/hiding Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window 1

Display/hide the Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
• Select [View] ⇒ [Docking Window] ⇒ [Module List]/[Output]/[Supplementary
Information]. 2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
● Displaying Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window
The Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display.
(Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field configuration window 6 - 41

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration

window

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

Station information and equipment configuration of CC-Link can be set when master station or master
station (duplex function) is set in the CC-Link network parameter.
Select "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window" on the CC-Link network
parameter screen in advance.

Screen display
Click on the network parameter screen of CC-Link.

List of stations

Equipment
configuration

Operating procedure
1. Select a module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations' or
'equipment configuration'.
A slave station is added to the 'list of stations'.
The added module is displayed on the 'equipment configuration'.

Drag and drop

6 - 42 6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

2. Set the items on the screen.

1
Item Description

OVERVIEW
Mode Setting Select the mode by clicking .
TX Speed Set the transmission speed by clicking .
Link Scan Time (Approx.) Display the approximate value of link scan time.
List of stations Display the list of stations which configure CC-Link network. 2
Display the number of slave stations and station numbers set to the master station.

CONFIGURATION
"0/0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number/station number' is
Module No./Station No. displayed for slave station.
Example: For a module set as the 3rd module of the slave station and its station

SYSTEM
number is 6: 3/6
Display the module type of master station/slave station.
Model Name
When the module information does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed.

Station Type
Display the station type of master station/slave station. 3
Click the cell and select the station type displayed by clicking .

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Display the module version of slave station.
Version
Click the cell and select the version displayed by clicking .
Display the number of occupied stations of slave station.

SCREEN
# of STA Occupied
Click the cell and select the number of occupied stations displayed by clicking .
Expanded Cyclic Setting Display the expanded cyclic setting of slave station.
Remote Station Points Display the number of remote station points of slave station. 4
Display the setting status of reserved station/error invalid station for slave station.
Reserved/Err Invalid STA Click the cell and select the reserved station/error invalid station displayed by clicking

MANAGEMENT
.

PROJECT
Display buffer memory for Send/Receive/Auto when the salve station is an intelligent
Intelligent Buffer Size (word) device station.
Click the cell and enter the value.
Display the setting when the station-specific mode setting is supported by the slave
Station-specific mode station. 5
setting
Click the cell and select the station-specific mode displayed by clicking .
Equipment configuration Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link network graphically.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
3. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings of the CC-Link configuration window.
6
Screen button
● (LCPU only)
PARAMETERS
Acquires the station information and equipment configuration from the actual system configuration
SETTING

and displays them on the CC-Link configuration window.

For operations and considerations of setting station information and equipment configuration with the
Detect Now, refer to the following manual.
 iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual 7
SETTING DEVICE

● /
Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down.
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window 6 - 43

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

● Considerations when the selected status of "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window"
is changed
The following are the considerations when editing the station information by changing selected/cleared status.
• Selecting the item
The station information set on the CC-Link Station Information screen is set on the CC-Link configuration window
automatically.
Note that, all modules of the station information are changed to general-purpose CC-Link modules. The file size of
parameter to be written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
• Clearing the item
The station information set on the CC-Link configuration window is set on the CC-Link Station Information screen
automatically.
● Setting general-purpose CC-Link modules
When a non-Mitsubishi module or a module which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a general-
purpose CC-Link module.
A general-purpose CC-Link module can be replaced with a specific module.
(■ Replacing general-purpose CC-Link module)
● Display of module name on the 'equipment configuration'
"Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'equipment configuration'.

6 - 44 6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Replacing general-purpose CC-Link module 1

Replace a general-purpose CC-Link module of slave station with a specific module.

A description of link device is displayed on the CC-Link Device Reference window by replacing a

OVERVIEW
general-purpose CC-Link module with a specific module.

Operating procedure
2
1. Select a general-purpose CC-Link module to be replaced in the 'list of stations' on

CONFIGURATION
the CC-Link configuration window.

SYSTEM
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] ⇒ [Change Module] ⇒ [Replace General CC-Link
Module].
The Replace General CC-Link Module screen is displayed. 3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
List of modules 4
to be replaced

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description 6
Display the version, the number of occupied stations, station type, and expanded cyclic
Replacement Target
setting of the module selected on the CC-Link configuration window.
Display modules with the same condition as the module selected for "Replacement PARAMETERS
List of modules to be Target".
SETTING

replaced Select the check box(es) on the "Station Number" column of the module to be replaced.
Two or more modules can be selected.
Replacement Candidate Select a module to be replaced with.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window 6 - 45

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

4. Click the button.

The general-purpose CC-Link module in the list of stations is replaced with the module selected for
"Replacement Candidate". The general-purpose CC-Link module displayed on the 'equipment
configuration' is replaced with the selected module.

The general-purpose
module is replaced with
the selected module.

Screen button
●
Selects all modules displayed on "Replacement Target".
●
Cancels the selected status of all modules selected for "Replacement Target".

■ Changing to general-purpose CC-Link module

Change a module of slave station to a general-purpose CC-Link module.

Operating procedure
1. Select a module to be changed in the 'list of stations' on the CC-Link configuration
window.

2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] ⇒ [Change Module] ⇒ [Change to General CC-Link

Module].
The module is changed to the corresponding general-purpose CC-Link module.

■ Checking system configuration of CC-Link

Check whether the equipment configuration of CC-Link is correct after setting the station information on
the CC-Link configuration window.

Operating procedure
• Select [CC-Link Configuration] ⇒ [Check] ⇒ [System Configuration].
The system configuration of CC-Link is checked.
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.

6 - 46 6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Performing parameter processing of slave station 1

Perform the processing relates to parameters of slave stations.

The applicable parameter processing differs according to the target slave station.

OVERVIEW
The setting status and setting values of the Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen can be
saved in the CSV file format.

CONFIGURATION
● Considerations when performing parameter processing
Check the following before performing the parameter processing.
• The programmable controller CPU set as a connection target is in STOP status.

SYSTEM
• The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter.
• The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC-Link configuration.
• A refresh device is set on the CC-Link parameter of programmable controller CPU. 3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to which parameters are applied from the 'list of stations' on the

SCREEN
CC-Link configuration window.

2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] ⇒ [Online] ⇒ [Parameter Processing of Slave 4

Station].

MANAGEMENT
The Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of FR-A720-0.4K.

PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window 6 - 47

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

3. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Display the information of target equipment on which the parameter processing is
Target Module Information
performed.
Method selection Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking .
Select the parameter(s) to perform the processing and enter settings such as a
Parameter Information
writing value.
Display only selectable Select this to display only parameters to which the processing selected for
parameters "Method selection" can be performed.
Process Option Set this for the processing selected for "Method selection".

4. Click the button.

The parameter processing is performed.

Screen button
●
Selects all parameters of "Parameter Information".
●
Cancels the selected status of all the parameters selected for "Parameter Information".
●
Imports the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" saved in the CSV file
format in advance.
●
Saves the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" in the CSV file format.

6 - 48 6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Performing commands for slave stations 1

Perform commands for slave stations.

Applicable commands differ according to the target slave station.

OVERVIEW
● Considerations when performing commands 2
Check the following before performing commands.

CONFIGURATION
• The programmable controller CPU set as a connection target is in STOP status.
• The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter.
• The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC-Link configuration.

SYSTEM
• A refresh device is set on the CC-Link parameter of programmable controller CPU.

Operating procedure 3

CONFIGURATION AND
1.

BASIC OPERATIONS
Select a module on which a command is performed from the 'list of stations' on the
CC-Link configuration window.

SCREEN
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] ⇒ [Online] ⇒ [Command Execution of Slave
Station].
4
The Command Execution of Slave Station screen is displayed.
The following is a screen of FR-A720-0.4K.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6
3. Set the items on the screen.
PARAMETERS
Item Description
SETTING

Target Module Information Display the information of target module on which the command is performed.
Method selection Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking .
Command Setting Set the writing values for the processing selected for "Method selection". 7
SETTING DEVICE

4. Click the button.

The command processing is performed.
MEMORY

The result of the processing is displayed on "Execution Result".

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window 6 - 49

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

■ Copying/pasting modules

Copy/paste a selected module.

Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No./Station No." or "Model Name" of the module to be copied from
the 'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.

Select "Module No.

/Station No." or
"Model Name".

2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Copy].

The selected module is copied.

3. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste].

The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.

■ Deleting modules

Delete a selected module.

Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No./Station No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted from
the 'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.

Select "Module No.

/Station No." or
"Model Name".

2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete].

The selected module is deleted.

● Selected status of modules

All cells on the 'list of stations' can be selected by selecting [Edit] ⇒ [Select All].

6 - 50 6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

■ Displaying/hiding Module List/Output window 1

Display/hide the Module List/Output window.

OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
• Select [View] ⇒ [Docking Window] ⇒ [Module List]/[Output].
2

CONFIGURATION
● Displaying Module List/Output window
The Module List/Output window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display.

SYSTEM
(Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link configuration window 6 - 51

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.3.4 Registering profiles

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

Register profiles in GX Works2.

Profiles are data in which equipment information (module models, number of occupied stations, station
types, etc.) of CC IE Field modules and CC-Link modules is stored.
CC IE Field modules or CC-Link modules of slave stations are added to the module list on the CC IE
Field configuration window or the CC-Link configuration window by registering profiles. The previously
registered module information is also updated.
Close the project in advance when registering profiles.

Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Register Profile].

Operating procedure
• Select the profile, and click the button.
The profile is registered.
The added module can be found in the module list on the CC IE Field configuration window or the
CC-Link configuration window when the project is opened next time.
The following is the display of the CC-Link configuration window.

A CC-Link module
is added.

6 - 52 6.3.4 Registering profiles

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

1
● Managing profiles
Profiles are managed by each personal computer, and shared within GX Works2 and MELSOFT Navigator. Therefore,

OVERVIEW
profiles registered in GX Works2 are applied to MELSOFT Navigator.

6.3.5 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules 2

CONFIGURATION
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

SYSTEM
Display a list of refresh devices assigned to CC-Link modules.
Set the CC-Link parameters in advance.
3
Screen display

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Select [View] ⇒ [Docking Window] ⇒ [CC-Link Device Reference] ( ).
● List of slave stations

SCREEN
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is cleared >

MANAGEMENT
List of

PROJECT
slave stations

< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected >

PROGRAMS
● List of link devices

EDITING
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is cleared >

List of PARAMETERS
SETTING

link devices

< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected >

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.5 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules 6 - 53

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

Operating procedure
• Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Select the start I/O number of master station or local station from the list displayed by
Master/Local Start I/O No.
clicking to display the list of slave stations or link devices.
Slave Station List
Switch the display between the list of slave stations and the list of link device stations.
Link Device List
Display Detailed Configuration Select this to display the detailed information of the list of slave stations or list of link
Information devices.

Display contents
Item Description
Slave Station List This item is displayed when 'list of slave stations' is selected.
Display the information of the slave stations and the range of the refresh devices
assigned to the host station.
When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected, the range of the buffer
List of slave stations
memory is also displayed.
When refresh devices are not assigned, the cells of the refresh device range will be
blank.
Link Device List This item is displayed when 'list of link device stations' is selected.
Display the assignment status of refresh devices on the host station and link devices on
the target station.
List of link device stations When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected, link devices and buffer
memory are also displayed on the host station side.
When profiles are not registered, the "Explanation" cells will be blank.

Screen button
●
Opens the screen to set the display options.
Select the item displayed by clicking for "Module Name/Object Name" and "Buffer Memory
Display Format", and click the button.

6 - 54 6.3.5 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules

 6.3 Setting Network Parameters

●
1
Opens the screen to set the purpose and the output format of CSV file output.
Set "Use", "Select Data Range", and "Label Output Format", and click the button.

OVERVIEW
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
When "Output CSV file for global label" is selected for "Use", the output CSV file can be imported on
the Global Label Setting screen.
(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)) 4
(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project))

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.3.5 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules 6 - 55

 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

● Display content of CC-Link Device Reference window

All items are displayed on the CC-Link Device Reference window when the station information is set on the CC-Link
configuration window.
When the station information is set on the CC-Link Station Information screen, the model name or object name of the
target module is not displayed. When a local station, master station (duplex function), or standby master station is set
for the type, the assignment status of refresh devices is not displayed.
● Checking refresh devices supported by master station and local station
With a CC-Link configuration containing a local station, when checking refresh devices supported by refresh devices
which are set on the master station, open the project of the local station and check them on the CC-Link Device
Reference window.
Example: When checking refresh devices of local station which supports refresh device D2008 of the master station

< Project of master station > < Project of local station >
The value of RWw3 is refreshed by the value of D2008. The value of D3008 is refreshed by the value of RWr3.

When a value is stored to D2008

on the master station, a value is
stored to D3008 on the local station.

● Displaying list of link devices

• The selected slave station can be displayed on top of the cell by right-clicking 'list of link devices' and selecting
[Select Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.

Select the station number 7 The station number 7

of the slave station. is displayed at the top.

• The Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen is displayed by right-clicking a refresh device or buffer memory
selected from the 'list of link devices' and selecting [Device/Buffer Memory Batch] from the shortcut menu. For details
of the device/buffer memory batch monitoring, refer to Section 14.3.

6 - 56 6.3.5 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules

 6.4 Setting Remote Password

1
6.4 Setting Remote Password
*1

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

*1 : CC IE Field head module only

This section explains how to set a password to prevent illegal access from remote users to the QCPU
(Q mode)/LCPU via a Q series-compatible E71 module, C24 module, or Built-in Ethernet type CPU.
2

CONFIGURATION
Screen display

SYSTEM
Select Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "Remote Password".
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Item Description
Password Set the password.
Set the model of the routing programmable controller CPU or module.
Model Name
For the programmable controller CPU, select "Built-in Ethernet type CPU". 6
Start XY Set the start I/O number.
Set the details when selecting Built-in Ethernet type CPU or QJ71E71.
PARAMETERS
Password Active
Module Setting ● User connection No. valid setting
SETTING

Set whether to enable the remote password for the user connection No. 1 to No.
Condition
16.
● System connection valid setting
Set whether to enable the remote password for the system connections.
7
2. Click the button.
SETTING DEVICE

The Password Confirmation screen is displayed.

MEMORY

3. Enter the set password again.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6 - 57
 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

4. Click the button.

The remote password setting ends.
To set the password on the programmable controller CPU, write the parameter to the
programmable controller CPU using the Write to PLC function.
(Section 12.1)

● Modules that support remote password setting

For the modules that support the remote password setting and the details of the remote password setting, refer to the
user's manual of the programmable controller CPU, Q series-compatible E71 module or C24 module to be used.
● Characters for password
Enter the password in 4 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and symbols corresponding to ASCII codes 20H to 7EH
(Appendix 3).

6 - 58
 6.5 Checking Parameters

1
6.5 Checking Parameters

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains how to check errors in the PLC parameter and the network parameter which are
set in the project.
The result of the parameter check is displayed on the Output window. 2

CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Check Parameter].

SYSTEM
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU> <FXCPU>

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure

PROJECT
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
5
Check Target Select the items for the check parameter.

2. Click the button.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
The check parameter is performed, and the result is displayed on the Output window.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6 - 59
 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

The following parameters can be written to CSV files.

● I/O assignment setting
Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "PLC Parameter" ⇒ <<I/O Assignment>>
● Acknowledge XY assignment
Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "PLC Parameter" ⇒
Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "Network Parameter" ⇒ "(network parameter)" ⇒

Operating procedure
1. Click the button.
The confirmation message for writing data is displayed.
< I/O assignment setting >

2. Click the button.

The Write to CSV file screen is displayed.

3. Enter a file name of the data to be saved.

4. Click the button.

Parameters are saved to a CSV file.

6 - 60
 6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files

■ CSV file format 1

The following is an image of the saved CSV file opened with Excel.

OVERVIEW
• Example of CSV file for I/O assignment setting
< I/O Assignment setting >

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
< CSV file >

SCREEN
4
I/O assignment Detailed setting Switch setting Basic setting

MANAGEMENT
• Example of CSV file for acknowledge XY assignment

PROJECT
< Acknowledge XY Assignment screen >

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6
< CSV file >

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE

● Details of CSV file

The following explains the details of CSV file format.
MEMORY

• The file format is Unicode (including UTF-16, Little Endian, and BOM).
• The delimiter of items is a tab (\t).
• Each item is enclosed in double quotation marks (").
• If the item contains double quotation marks ("), the double quotation marks in the item are 8
expressed as two double quotation marks ("").
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

• A line feed is set at the end of the line.

The line feed code is LF.

6 - 61
 GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.7 Setting default parameters

Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX

This section explains how to set default parameters to the PLC parameter or the network parameter in
batch.

Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Clear All Parameters].
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

Operating procedure
1. Set the item on the screen.
Item Description
Select Data Select the parameter to which default parameters are set.

2. Click the button.

Default parameters are set to the selected parameter.

6 - 62
 1

OVERVIEW
7 SETTING DEVICE 2
MEMORY

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
This chapter explains the settings of the device memory.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
7.1 Device Memory 7-2

MANAGEMENT
7.2 Setting Device Memory 7-5

PROJECT
7.3 Searching Devices 7 - 15

7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data 7 - 16 5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7-1
 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.1 Device Memory

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

This section explains the features of the device memory.

7.1.1 Features of device memory

Device memory is the function that reads/writes data from/to the device memory on a programmable
controller CPU.
● Read
The function batch-reads device memory data from a programmable controller CPU to GX Works2.
The read data can be used to check the status of the device memory on a programmable controller
CPU as well as for offline debugging.
● Write
The function batch-writes device memory data from GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU.
The current values of the device memory on a programmable controller CPU can be batch changed.

7-2 7.1.1 Features of device memory

 7.1 Device Memory

7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen 1

■ QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

OVERVIEW
: Can be edited : Display only –: Not supported

Category Device type Symbol Display/edit

Input X 
2
Output Y

CONFIGURATION

Internal relay M 
Latch relay L 

SYSTEM
Annunciator F 
Edge relay V 
Step relay S  3
Link relay B 

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Link special relay SB 
Current value T 

SCREEN
Timer Contact TS –
Internal user device Coil TC –
Current value C 
Counter Contact CS –
4
Coil CC –

MANAGEMENT
Current value ST 

PROJECT
Retentive timer Contact STS –
Coil STC –
Data register D 
Link register W  5
Link special register SW 
Direct input DX –

PROGRAMS
Direct output DY –

EDITING
Special relay SM 
Internal system device
Special register SD 
Link input J\X 
Link output J\Y  6
Link register J\W 
Link direct device
PARAMETERS
Link special register J\SW 
Link relay J\B 
SETTING

Link special relay J\SB 

R*1 –
File register File register
ZR*1,*2  7
Index register Index register Z 
SETTING DEVICE

Intelligent function module

Intelligent function module device U\G 
device
MEMORY

*1 : Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.

*2 : For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the device cannot be used when '0k' is set for "Device points" of file register
(ZR(R)) under "File Register Extended Setting" on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen 7-3

 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

■ FXCPU

: Can be edited : Display only –: Not supported

Display/edit
Category Device type Symbol FX0 FX1N FXU FX2N FX3G FX3U
FX0N FX1 FX1S
FX0S FX1NC FX2C FX2NC FX3GC FX3UC
Input X         
Output Y         
Internal relay M         
Internal State S         
user
device Timer T         
Counter*1 C         
Data register D         
File register D –  –      
Internal Special relay M         
system
device Special data register D         

Extended register R – – – – – – –  
Extended file register ER – – – – – – –  
*1 : 32-bit counter (C200 and later) is not supported.

7-4 7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen

 7.2 Setting Device Memory

1
7.2 Setting Device Memory

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

This section explains how to set a device and device value.

Screen display
2

CONFIGURATION
Select Project view ⇒ "Device Memory" ⇒ "(data name)".

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Device number Device value
display area display area 5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7-5
 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

● Inserting rows
Select [Edit] ⇒ [Insert Row] to insert a blank row at the cursor position.

[Edit] ⇒ [Insert Row]

● Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of rows

To paste a character string in units of rows, select the desired cell(s) and paste the character string. If a row is selected,
pasting is not possible.
● Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of cells
To paste a character string in units of cells, if the selected cell(s) is in the row where a device is not entered, pasting is
not possible.
● Copying device memory
Device memory data of the selected range can be copied and pasted to Excel. Data can also be copied and pasted to
device memory from Excel.
When a value other than 0 is pasted as a bit device, it is replaced to 1.
● Deleting devices
If a deletion is executed after selecting a cell, the device value clears to '0'.
If a deletion is executed after selecting a row, the selected row (device) is deleted.

<Deletion in units of cells>

[Edit] ⇒ [Delete]

The device values are set to “0”.

<Deletion in units of rows>

[Edit] ⇒ [Delete]

The selected rows are deleted.

7-6
 7.2 Setting Device Memory

7.2.1 Setting device values in units of points 1

Set a device and device value in units of points.

OVERVIEW
Create a new device memory in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
Example) Set the following values.
'Device: D0, Device value: 12'
2
Operating procedure

CONFIGURATION
1. Select the cell to which a device value is set.

SYSTEM
3
2. Enter 'D0' for a device.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
3. Press the  key.
The entered device is set in the device number display area. 4
In this example, 'D0' is set in the device number display area and
the value is displayed in the device value display area.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
4. Enter '12' for a device value.
'12' is set as the device value of device 'D0'.
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.2.1 Setting device values in units of points 7-7

 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range

■ Setting device values by specifying a device range on the Input Device

screen

Set device values by specifying a device range on the Input Device screen.
Example) Set the following values.
'Device: D, range: 0 to 50, display format: decimal number'

Operating procedure
1. Select the cell to which a device value is set.

2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Input Device] ( ).

The Input Device screen is displayed.

3. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Select the device name.
Device
For devices that can be edited, refer to Section 7.1.2.
Module Start*1 Display when U\G or J\ is selected in the "Device" field.
Network No.*1 Enter the start XY address or network number.

Range Select the range of devices to be set.

All Select this to target all of the selected devices.
Address Select this to target the devices in the specified range.
Display Mode Select the display format of device values.
BIN Select this to display device values in binary numbers.
OCT Select this to display device values in octal numbers.
DEC Select this to display device values in decimal numbers.
HEX Select this to display device values in hexadecimal numbers.
FLOAT Select this to display device values in real numbers.
String Select this to display device values in character strings.
String (ASCII only) Select this to display device values in ASCII strings.

7-8 7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range

 7.2 Setting Device Memory

Item Description
1
Register Select the display size of device values.
16-bit Select this to display the display size of device values in words.

OVERVIEW
Select this to display the display size of device values in double words.
32-bit
Specify the device range in multiples of two.
Select this to display the display size of device values in double-precision real
64-bit numbers.
Specify the device range in multiples of four. 2
Device Value Enter a value to set device values simultaneously.

CONFIGURATION
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.

4.

SYSTEM
Click the button.
Devices in the range from D0 to D50 are registered to cells and the values are displayed.
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5. Enter a device value to each cell. 5
The entered values are set.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range 7-9

 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

■ Setting device values by specifying a device range on the cell

Set device values by specifying a device range on the cell.

Example) Set the following values.
'Device: D, range: 20 to 40, display format: decimal number'

Operating procedure
1. Select a cell to which the device value is set.

2. Enter the device range.

3. Click the  button.

Devices from D20 to D140 are registered to the cells and the values are displayed.

● Display format of bit device and word device

The following table shows the display format of bit device and word device when the device range is specified on the
cell.

Device Value Display format Display size

Bit device 0 Binary –
Word device 0 Decimal 16 bits

● Device registration when only the start address or the end address is specified
A device range can be specified by specifying the start address or the end address only.
• When only the start address is specified (Example: Specify 'D0-' for the device range)
Devices from 'D0' to the last valid address are registered to the cells.
• When only the end address is specified (Example: Specify '-D100' for the device range)
Devices from 'D0 to D100' are registered to the cells.
● Abbreviating device name
When specifying a device range on the cell, only the end address can be abbreviated.
For example, when a device range is specified with 'D0-100', the devices in the range of 'D0-D100' are registered.
● Specifying R devices (This function is not supported by FXCPU.)
When R device is specified, it is changed to ZR device and registered.

7 - 10 7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range

 7.2 Setting Device Memory

7.2.3 Setting character strings 1

Set a character string to a device.

OVERVIEW
Set "Display Mode" to 'String' in advance. (Section 7.2.5)

Operating procedure
2
1. Select a range of cells to which a character string is set.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste Text].
The Paste Text screen is displayed.
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

3. Enter a character string, and click the button.

PROGRAMS
EDITING
The entered character string is set to the selected cells or row.

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE

● Entering character strings

When "Register" is '16-bit', '32-bit', or '64-bit', the maximum number of characters that can be entered to one cell is 2, 4,
MEMORY

or 8 respectively.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.2.3 Setting character strings 7 - 11

 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.2.4 Setting same value simultaneously

Set the same value to continuous devices.

Operating procedure
1. Select devices to which a value is to be set.

2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Fill] ( ).

The FILL screen is displayed.

3. Set the items on the screen.

Item Description
Data Format Select the data format of device values.
BIN Select this to set device values in binary numbers.
OCT Select this to set device values in octal numbers.
DEC Select this to set device values in decimal numbers.
HEX Select this to set device values in hexadecimal numbers.
Device Value Enter a value set to devices simultaneously.

4. Click the button.

The specified device value is set to devices simultaneously.

● Setting the same value simultaneously

Device values can also be set simultaneously by selecting a range, right-clicking it on the device memory editor, and
selecting [FILL] from the shortcut menu.

7 - 12 7.2.4 Setting same value simultaneously

 7.2 Setting Device Memory

7.2.5 Changing display format 1

■ Switching display format

OVERVIEW
Switch the device value display format for each cell on the device memory editor.

Operating procedure
2

CONFIGURATION
• Select [View] ⇒ [Display Mode] ⇒ [Binary/Octal/Decimal/Hexadecimal/Float/String/
String (ASCII)].

SYSTEM
Device values are displayed in the selected display format.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
■ Switching display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit

Switch the device value display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit for each cell on the device memory editor.
5
Operating procedure
• Select [View] ⇒ [Register] ⇒ [16-bit/32-bit/64-bit].

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Device values are displayed in the selected display size (16 bits, 32 bits, or 64 bits).

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.2.5 Changing display format 7 - 13

 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.2.6 Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory

editor

Change the number of rows/columns on the device memory editor.

Screen display
Select [View] ⇒ [Setup].

Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Description
Number of Columns Set the number of columns on the editor.
Auto Select this to set the number of columns to 16.
Specify the number of Select this to set the desired number of columns on the editor.
columns (1 - 255) Setting range: 1 to 255
Row Set the number of rows on the editor.
4096 Rows Select this to set the number of rows to 4096.
Specify the number of Select this to set the desired number of rows on the editor.
rows (16 - 655360) Setting range: 16 to 655360
Additional Safety Inquiry Select this to display the confirmation message when device deletion is executed.

2. Click the button.

The set number of rows/columns are displayed.

● Number of columns
When "Number of Columns" is set to "Auto", the device values are displayed in 10 columns or 16 columns according to
the specified devices.
For FXCPU, the device values of X and Y are displayed in 8 columns.
● Considerations for changing rows and columns
When a value smaller than the current value is set for "Number of Columns" or "Row", a confirmation message is
displayed and the data on the device memory editor is discarded.
When a value larger than the current value is set for "Number of Columns", the sequence of devices registered to the
device memory editor do not change by the setting of "Number of Columns".

7 - 14 7.2.6 Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor

 7.3 Searching Devices

1
7.3 Searching Devices

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

This section explains how to search for a device set in the device memory.

Screen display
2

CONFIGURATION
Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Find Device Cell].

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.

SCREEN
Item Description
Find what Enter the device to be searched for. 4
Up Select this to perform searching in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Direction
Down Select this to perform searching in the downward direction from the cursor position.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
2. Click the button.
The cursor moves to the found device.
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7 - 15
 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

This section explains how to write/read device memory data being edited to/from a programmable
controller CPU or Excel file.

7.4.1 Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs

Write/read device memory data to/from a programmable controller CPU.

To write/read device memory data in units of files, refer to the online Write to PLC/Read from PLC
function. (Section 12.1)

Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Write Device Memory to PLC]/[Read Device Memory from PLC].
<Writing device memory> <Reading device memory>

Operating procedure
• Set the item on the screen.
Item Description
Range Select the write/read range.
Select this to write/read data in the specified range to/from a programmable controller
Selected Devices
CPU.
Select this to write/read all data in the device memory being edited to/from a programmable
All Devices
controller CPU.

7 - 16 7.4.1 Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs

 7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data

7.4.2 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files 1

Write/read device memory data to/from an Excel file.

OVERVIEW
Screen display
Select [Tool] ⇒ [Write to Excel File]/[Read from Excel File]. 2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
Operating procedure
1. Enter a file name or select the file to be opened.
The Save As screen or Open screen is displayed. 5
2. Click the or button.

PROGRAMS
Data are saved to the specified destination, or the file is opened from the specified location.

EDITING
● Compatible Excel version 6
Microsoft Office Excel 97 or later version is compatible with the data write/read operations.
● Reading data
PARAMETERS
When data are read from an Excel file, they are read with the saved setting of "Number of Columns".
The following are regarded as errors and processed as explained.
SETTING

• Unsupported devices ⇒ Deleted

• Invalid value ⇒ Set to '0'.
• Invalid display format ⇒ Displayed in decimal numbers.
7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.4.2 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files 7 - 17

 GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

MEMO

7 - 18
 1

OVERVIEW
8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL 2
VALUES

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
This chapter explains how to set, edit, and delete device initial values.

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
4
8.1 Device Initial Values 8-2

MANAGEMENT
8.2 Setting Device Initial Values 8-5

PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

8-1
 GX Works2

8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

8.1 Device Initial Values

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

This section explains the device initial values.

8.1.1 Feature of device initial values

The device initial values are device values used for the sequence program operation when the
programmable controller turns RUN.
When the device initial values are set, the initial setting program is unnecessary.
● When device initial values are not set
The initial setting program is necessary.
Example)

● When device initial values are set

Example)

The initial setting program is unnecessary.

8-2 8.1.1 Feature of device initial values

 8.1 Device Initial Values

8.1.2 List of applicable devices for device initial values 1

The following table shows the list of devices which can be used as device initial values.

OVERVIEW
Category Device name Device
Timer T
Retentive timer ST 2
Counter C
Internal user device

CONFIGURATION
Data register D
Link register W

SYSTEM
Link special register SW
Internal system device Special register SD
File register File register R*1,*2, ZR*2
Intelligent function module
3
Intelligent function module device U\G

CONFIGURATION AND
device

BASIC OPERATIONS
Link register J\W
Link direct device
Link special register J\SW

SCREEN
*1 : When the R device is specified to utilize the device memory data, the ZR device value is utilized for the R device.
*2 : Not applicable to Q00UJ.

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
6

PARAMETERS
SETTING

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

8.1.2 List of applicable devices for device initial values 8-3

 GX Works2

8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

8.1.3 Procedure for setting device initial values

The following flow chart shows the procedure for setting the device initial values.

Start

Select [Project] [Object] [New] to add

the device initial value data.

Set the device range to be

used for device initial values.

Select [Project] [Object] [New] to

create the device memory data.

Set the device values within the

range of the device initial value.

Click the button

to set the device values
of the device memory as
device initial values.

Operations on the Device Initial Value screen Operations on the Device Memory screen
Perform settings on the <<PLC File>>
tab of PLC parameter to use the
device initial values.

Select [Online] [Write to PLC]

to write the device initial values and the
parameter to the programmable controller CPU.

Completed

8-4 8.1.3 Procedure for setting device initial values

 8.2 Setting Device Initial Values

1
8.2 Setting Device Initial Values

OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote
FX Head
FX FX

This section explains how to set device values set in the device memory as device initial values.
Create a new device initial value data in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
2
Screen display

CONFIGURATION
Select Project view ⇒ "Device Initial Value" ⇒ "(data name)".

SYSTEM
3

CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS
SCREEN
Range setting

MANAGEMENT
PROJECT
5

PROGRAMS
EDITING
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
6
Item Description
Range setting Set the range for device initial values.

Points
Set the number of points of each device. Up to 8,000 points of devices can be set PARAMETERS
within a range.
SETTING

Start Specify the start device of the range to be set.

End Specify the end device of the range to be set.
Comment Enter a comment in the set device range. (Up to 32 characters) 7
Setting Start/End Select this to set the range for device initial values by start or end device.
SETTING DEVICE

Method Points/Start Select this to set the range for device initial values by device points or start device.

2.
MEMORY

Select the data name to be utilized from in "Device Memory Diversion", and click
the button.
The device value in the set range is set as a device initial value. 8
3.
SETTING DEVICE

Click the button.

INITIAL VALUES

8-5
 GX Works2

8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

Screen button
●
Executes printing. (Section 20.7)
●
Executes print preview. (Section 20.9)
●
Displays the Print Setting (Device Initial Value) screen. (Section 20.8.2)

● Using device initial values

If the device values with set ranges are used as the initial values when activating the programmable controller CPU,
specify the file name to be used for the initial values on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
● Device range
The device range that can be set for device initial values is the range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.

8-6
 9

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS
9 SETTING DEVICE 10
COMMENTS

SEARCH/REPLACE
This chapter explains the operation methods for setting, editing, and deleting device comments.

11

CONNECTION DESTINATION
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
12
9.1 Device Comments 9-2

WRITING/READING
9.2 Creating Device Comments 9 - 10

DATA
9.3 Deleting Device Comments 9 - 14

9.4 Extending Number of Points of Device Comment 9 - 15 13

9.5 Utilizing Sample Comments 9 - 16

PROTECTING
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files 9 - 18

DATA
14

MONITORING

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

9-1
 GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.1 Device Comments

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX Head
FX FX

This section explains the general concept of device comments and the setting availability.

9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments

Device comment is categorized into global device comment and local device comment.

■ Global device comments

A global device comment is a device comment created automatically when a new project is created.
Global device comments are set to use common device comment data among multiple programs.
Global device comments can be set even when there is only one program.

A global device comment name

is fixed to COMMENT.
Global device comments can
be changed to local device
comments.

<Image that is created with only global device comments>

Sequence program MAIN

COMMENT Global device comment Sequence program SUB1

Sequence program SUB2

9-2 9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments

 9.1 Device Comments

■ Local device comments 9

SETTING DEVICE
A local device comment is a device comment created by the user.

COMMENTS
No local device comment exists when a new project is created.
Create a local device comment if necessary. (Section 4.3.1)
Local device comments are used in association with each program.
Device comments are set under the same name as sequence programs.
For Structured projects, device comments are set under the same data name as the program file name. 10

SEARCH/REPLACE
11

CONNECTION DESTINATION
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
Display example when local device comments are set.

CONTROLLER CPU
<Image of a project created with only local device comments>
12

WRITING/READING
MAIN Local device comment Sequence program MAIN

SUB1 Local device comment Sequence program SUB1

DATA
SUB2 Local device comment Sequence program SUB2

13

PROTECTING
DATA
14

MONITORING

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments 9-3

 GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

● Writing device comments to a programmable controller CPU

Up to the following number of device comments can be written to the programmable controller CPU.
Per device: 32k points
Total number of device comments: 64k points
When the number of set device comments exceeds the number of points that can be written to the programmable
controller CPU, set the range when writing device comments to the programmable controller CPU. (Section 12.1.3)
● Data name of global device comments
A global device comment is displayed as "COMMENT" in the screen for Write to PLC/Read from PLC.
● Setting local device comments with data names different from the sequence program name
Multiple local device comments can be created with data names different from the sequence program name. In this
case, however, the comments are not related to the sequence program.
To make the comments relate to the sequence program, the comments should have the same data names as the
program name.
This is useful for cases, such as when switching comments between Japanese and English in the same program.

MAIN Local device comment Sequence program MAIN

MAIN-J Local device comment

MAIN-E Local device comment Not related to the sequence program.

If data names are changed to 'MAIN',
comments are applied.

● Global device comments/local device comments

Global device comments/local device comments correspond respectively to common comments/comments by program
in GX Developer.
● Device comments for Basic model QCPU
Global device comments are not supported by Basic model QCPU.
A local device comment for Basic model QCPU is fixed to "MAIN".
When an SFC program is created, the SFC program "MAIN-SFC" also refers to a local device comment "MAIN".

<Image of an SFC program for Basic model QCPU>

MAIN-SFC program
MAIN Local device comment
MAIN program

● Local device comments for FXCPU

For FXCPU, local device comments cannot be written to a programmable controller CPU. If local device comments
needs to be written, create comments as global device comments, or change local device comments to global device
comments. When changing a local device comment to a global device comment, change its data name to
"COMMENT". (Section 4.3.3)
● Difference between device comment and label comment
A device comment is a comment appended to a device, and it is 'data' to be read from/write to a programmable
controller CPU.
A label comment is a comment appended to a defined label. A label comment is not applied to a device comment even
when a program is compiled.

9-4 9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments

 9.1 Device Comments

■ Displaying device comments on program editors 9

SETTING DEVICE
Device comments can be displayed on program editors.

COMMENTS
The following are the settings to display device comments.
● Displaying device comments on the program editor (ladder editor and Zoom editor only)
Select [View] ⇒ [Comment].
Device comments are displayed on the ladder editor or the Zoom editor.
● Displaying device comments on tooltips
10

SEARCH/REPLACE
Select "Device Comment" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder/SFC"/"Structured
Ladder/FBD/ST"*1 ⇒ "Tool hint display items".
Device comments are displayed on tooltips.
*1 : For Simple project (with labels), select "ST" instead of "Ladder/SFC"/"Structured Ladder/FBD/ST".

11

CONNECTION DESTINATION
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
12

WRITING/READING
DATA
13

PROTECTING
DATA
14

MONITORING

15
SIMULATING